ARTHAM

ARTHAM
R E S O U R C E M AT E R I A L
SOE
R E S O U R C E M AT E R I A L
NO. 1 EDUCATIONAL RESOURCES

COMPETENCY-BASED
QUESTION
B
A+ +
BANK
WITH ANSWER KEY
& STRUCTURED EXPLANATION

CLASS 12
PHYSICS

FEATURES
1 Comprehensive 2 Skill-based Learning
Develops critical thinking
3 Score Boosting
Helps to score maximum
Coverage
Includes detailed question and problem-solving skills marks in CBSE exams and
banks for Class 11 & 12 essential for cracking tough increases competitive exam
subjects PCMB exams. success potential..

4 Answer Key & 5 Exam Pattern 6 Competitive 7 NCERT Integration

Structured Explanations Aligned Exam Focus Questions and answers are
SOE Clear, well-structured Questions modeled after Specially designed to help based on the NCERT syllabus,
ensuring relevance for both
ARTHAM
R E S O U R C E M AT E R I A L
www.educatorsresource.in explanations and step-by-step the latest exam patterns to students excel in IIT, NEET,
CBSE board exams and
NO. 1 EDUCATIONAL RESOURCES
solutions to enhance ensure students are JEE, CUET, and other
understanding. well-prepared. competitive exams. entrance tests.
 10. WAVE OPTICS

1. The phenomenon of polarization of light indicates that

a) Light is a longitudinal wave
b) Light is a transverse wave
c) Light is not a wave
d) Light travels with the velocity of 3 × 108 ms−1
2. Diffraction and interference of light suggest
a) Nature of light is electro-magnetic b) Wave nature
c) Nature is quantum d) Nature of light is transverse
3. The 21 𝑐𝑚 radio wave emitted by hydrogen in interstellar space is due to the interaction called the
hyperfine interaction is atomic hydrogen. the energy of the emitted wave is nearly
a) 10−17 𝐽𝑜𝑢𝑙𝑒 b) 1 𝐽𝑜𝑢𝑙𝑒 c) 7 × 10−8 𝐽𝑜𝑢𝑙𝑒 d) 10−24 𝐽𝑜𝑢𝑙𝑒
4. The fringe width in Young’s double slit experiment increases when
a) Wavelength increases
b) Distance between the slits increases
c) Distance between the source and screen decreases
d) The width of the slits increases
5. Biological importance of Ozone layer is
a) It stops ultraviolet rays b) Ozone rays reduce green house effect
c) Ozone layer reflects radio waves d) Ozone layer controls 𝑂2 /𝐻2 radio in atmosphere
6. A parallel beam of light of intensity 𝐼0 is incident on a glass plate, 25% of light is reflected by upper surface
and 50% of light is reflected from lower surface. The ratio of maximum to minimum intensity in
interference region of reflected rays is
2 2
1 3 1 3
+√ +√ 5 8
2 8 4 8
a) b) c) d)
1 3 1 3 8 5
− √8 − √8
(2 ) (2 )
7. A beam of ordinary unpolarised light passes through a tourmaline crystal 𝐶1 and then it passes through
another tourmaline crystal 𝐶2 , which is oriented such that its principal plane is parallel to that of 𝐶2 . The
intensity if emergent light is𝐼0 . Now 𝐶2 is rotated by 60° about the ray. The emergent ray will have an
intensity
a) 2𝐼0 b) 𝐼0 /2 c) 𝐼0 /4 d) 𝐼0 /√2
8. Which one of the following is INCORRECT statement in the transmission of electromagnetic waves
a) Ground wave propagation is for high frequency transmission
b) Sky wave propagation is facilitated by ionospheric
c) Space wave is of high frequency and is suitable for line of sight communication
d) Space wave is used for satellite communication
9. Find the thickness of a plate which will produce a change in optical path equal to half the wavelength 𝜆 of
the light passing through it normally. The refractive index of the plate 𝜇 is
𝜆 2𝜆 𝜆 𝜆
a) b) c) d)
4(𝜇 − 1) 4(𝜇 − 1) (𝜇 − 1) 2(𝜇 − 1)
10. Critical angle for certain medium is sin 0.6 . The polarizing angle of that medium is
−1 ( )
a) tan−1 [1.5] b) sin−1[0.8] c) tan−1 [1.6667] d) tan−1 [0.6667]
11. Electromagnetic waves can be deflected by
a) Electric field only b) Magnetic field only c) Both (a) and (b) d) None of these
12. If 𝑐 is the speed of electromagnetic waves in vacuum, its speed in a medium of dielectric constant 𝐾 and
relative permeability 𝜇𝑟 is
 1 𝑐 𝐾
a) 𝑣 = b) 𝑣 = 𝑐√𝜇𝑟 𝐾 c) 𝑣 = d) 𝑣 =
√𝜇𝑟 𝐾 √𝜇𝑟 𝐾 √𝜇𝑟 𝐶
13. In Young’s double slit experiment a minima is observed when path difference between the interfering
beam is
a) 𝜆 b) 1.5𝜆 c) 2𝜆 d) 2.25𝜆
14. When the angle of incidence on a material is 60°, the reflected light is completely polarized. The velocity of
the refracted ray inside the material is (in 𝑚𝑠 −1 )
3
a) 3 × 108 b) ( ) × 108 c) √3 × 108 d) 0.5 × 108
√2
15. A parallel monochromatic beam of light is incident normally on a narrow slit. A diffraction pattern is
formed on a screen placed perpendicular to the direction of incident beam. At the first maxima of the
diffraction pattern the phase difference between the rays coming from the edges of the slit is
a) 0 𝜋
b) c) 𝜋 d) 2𝜋
2
16. Light waves can be polarized as they are
a) Transverse b) Of high frequency c) Longitudinal d) Reflected
17. A diffraction pattern is obtained using a beam of red light. What happens if the red light is replaced by blue
light
a) No change
b) Diffraction bands become narrower and crowded together
c) Band become broader and farther apart
d) Bands disappear altogether
18. A Young’s double slit set up for interference is shifted from air to within water, then the fringe width
a) Becomes infinite b) Decreases c) Increases d) Remain unchanged
19. Ordinary light incident on a glass slab at the polarising angle, suffers a deviation of22°. The value of the
angle of refraction in glass in this case is
a) 56° b) 68° c) 34° d) 22°
20. The waves of wavelength 5900 Å emitted by any atom or molecule must have some finite total length
which is known as coherence length. For sodium light, this length is 2.4 𝑐𝑚. The number of oscillations in
this length will be
a) 4.068 × 108 b) 4.068 × 104 c) 4.068 × 106 d) 4.068 × 105
21. The width of a single slit if the first minimum is observed at an angle 2° with a light of wavelength 6980Å
a) 0.2 mm b) 2 × 10−5 mm c) 2 × 105 mm d) 2 mm
22. In the context of Doppler effect in light, the term ‘red shift’ signifies
a) Decrease in frequency b) Increase in frequency
c) Decrease in intensity d) Increase in intensity
23. The condition for obtaining secondary maxima in the diffraction pattern due to single slit is
𝜆 𝑛𝜆
a) 𝑎 sin 𝜃 = 𝑛𝜆 b) 𝑎 sin 𝜃 = (2𝑛 − 1) c) 𝑎 sin 𝜃 = (2𝑛 − 1)𝜆 d) 𝑎 sin 𝜃 =
2 2
24. In a single slit diffraction experiment first minimum for red light (660 𝑛𝑚) coincides with first maximum
of some other wavelength 𝜆’. The value of 𝜆′ is
a) 4400 Å b) 6600 Å c) 2000 Å d) 3500 Å
25. Two nicolprism are first crossed and then one of them is rotated through60°. The percentage of incident
light transmitted is
a) 1.25 b) 25.0 c) 37.5 d) 50
26. A narrow slit of width 2𝑚𝑚 is illuminated by monochromatic light of wavelength 500𝑛𝑚. The distance
between the first minima on either side on a screen at a distance of 1𝑚 is
a) 5𝑚𝑚 b) 0.5𝑚𝑚 c) 1𝑚𝑚 d) 10𝑚𝑚
27. In a two slit experiment with monochromatic light fringes are obtained on a screen placed at some
distance from the slits. If the screen is moved by 5 × 10−2 𝑚 towards the slits, the change in fringe width is
3 × 10−5 𝑚. If separation between the slits is 10−3 𝑚, the wavelength of light used is
 a) 6000 Å b) 5000 Å c) 3000 Å d) 4500 Å
28. Light propagates 2cm distance in glass of refractive index 1.5 in time𝑡0 . In the same time𝑡0 , light
propagates a distance of 2.25 cm in a medium. The refractive index of the medium is
a) 4/3 b) 3/2 c) 8/3 d) None of these
29. If Young’s double slit experiment, is performed in water
a) The fringe width will decrease b) The fringe width will increase
c) The fringe width will remain unchanged d) There will be no fringe
30. Which of the following shows green house effect
a) Ultraviolet rays b) Infrared rays c) 𝑋-rays d) None of these
31. At what angle should an unpolarised beam be incident on a crystal of𝜇 = √3, so that reflected beam is
polarised?
a) 45° b) 60° c) 90° d) 0°
32. In Young’s double slit experiment when wavelength used is 6000Å and the screen is 40 𝑐𝑚 from the slits,
the fringes are 0.012 𝑐𝑚 wide. What is the distance between the slits
a) 0.024 𝑐𝑚 b) 2.4 𝑐𝑚 c) 0.24 𝑐𝑚 d) 0.2 𝑐𝑚
33. Angular width of central maxima in the Fraunhoffter diffraction pattern of a slit is measured. The slit is
illuminated by light of wavelength 6000 Å. When the slit is illuminated by light of another wavelength, the
angular width decreases by 30%. The wavelength of this light will be
a) 6000 Å b) 4200 Å c) 3000 Å d) 1800 Å
34. An electromagnetic wave propagating along north has its electric field vector upwards. Its magnetic field
vector point towards
a) North b) East c) West d) Downwards
35. A glass slab of thickness 8 cm contains the same number of waves as 10 cm of water when both are
transverse by the same monochromatic light. If the refractive index of water is 4/3, then refractive index
of glass is
a) 5/4 b) 3/2 c) 5/3 d) 16/15
36. A beam of light of wavelength 600 nm from a distant source falls on a single slit 1 mm wide and the
resulting diffraction pattern is observed on a screen 2 m away. The distance between the first dark fringes
on either side of the central bright fringe is
a) 1.2 cm b) 1.2 mm c) 2.4 cm d) 2.4 mm
37. Two polaroids are placed in the path of unpolarized beam of intensity 𝐼0 such that no light is emitted from
the second polaroid. If a third Polaroid whose polarization axis makes an angle θ with the polarization
axis of first Polaroid, is placed between these polaroids, then the intensity of light emerging from the last
Polaroid will be
𝐼0 𝐼0 𝐼0
a) ( ) sin2 2𝜃 b) ( ) sin2 2𝜃 c) ( ) cos4 2θ d) 𝐼0 cos4 𝜃
8 4 2
38. Two slits separated by a distance of 1 mm are illuminated with red light of wavelength 6.5× 10−7 m. the
interference fringes are observed on a screen place 1 m from the slits. The distance between the third dark
fringe and the fifth bright fringe is equal to
a) 0.65 mm b) 1.63 mm c) 3.25 mm d) 4.88 mm
39. Radiations of intensity 0.5 𝑊/𝑚 are striking a metal plate. The pressure on the plate is
2

a) 0.166 × 10−8 𝑁/𝑚 2 b) 0.332 × 10−8 𝑁/𝑚 2 c) 0.111 × 10−8 𝑁/𝑚 2 d) 0.083 × 10−8 𝑁/𝑚 2
40. The principle of superposition is basic to the phenomenon of
a) Total internal reflection b) Interference
c) Reflection d) Refraction
41. In Young’s double slit experiment distance between source is 1 mm and distance between the screen and
source is 1m. If the fringe width on the screen is0.06 cm, then 𝜆 is
a) 6000 Å b) 4000 Å c) 1200 Å d) 2400 Å
42. In an interference experiment, third bright fringe is obtained at a point on the screen with a light of 700
nm. What should be the wavelength of the light source in order to obtain 5th bright fringe at the same
 point?
a) 500 nm b) 630 nm c) 750 nm d) 420 nm
43. Light passes successively through two polarimeter tubes each of length 0.29𝑚. The first tube contains
dextro rotatory solution of concentration 60𝑘𝑔𝑚 −3 and specific rotation 0.01𝑟𝑎𝑑 𝑚 2 𝑘𝑔−1 . The second
tube contains laevo rotatory solution of concentration 30𝑘𝑔/𝑚 3 and specific rotation 0.02𝑟𝑎𝑑𝑚 2 𝑘𝑔−1 .
The net rotation produced is
a) 15° b) 0° c) 20° d) 10°
44. For the sustained interference of light, the necessary condition is that the two sources should
a) Have constant phase difference b) Be narrow
c) Be close to each other d) Of same amplitude
45. The electromagnetic waves travel with a velocity
a) Equal to velocity of sound b) Equal to velocity of light
c) Less than velocity of light d) None of these
46. A parallel monochromatic beam of light is incident normally on a narrow slit. A diffraction pattern is
formed on a screen placed perpendicular to the direction of incident beam. At the first maximum of the
diffraction pattern, the phase difference between the rays coming from the edges of the slit is
a) 0 𝜋
b) c) 𝜋 d) 2𝜋
2
47. A light source approaches the observer with velocity 0.8 𝑐. The Doppler shift for the light of wavelength
5500Å is
a) 4400 Å b) 1833 Å c) 3167 Å d) 7333 Å
48. A parallel beam of monochromatic light of wavelength 5000 Å is incident normally on a single narrow slit
of width 0.001𝑚𝑚. The light is focused by a convex lens on a screen placed on the focal plane. The first
minimum will be formed for the angle of diffraction equal to
a) 0° b) 15° c) 30° d) 60°
49. In a Young’s experiment, two coherent sources are placed 0.90 𝑚𝑚 apart and the fringes are observed one
metre away. If it produces the second dark fringe at a distance of 1 𝑚𝑚 from the central fringe, the
wavelength of monochromatic light used would be
a) 60 × 10−4 𝑐𝑚 b) 10 × 10−4 𝑐𝑚 c) 10 × 10−5 𝑐𝑚 d) 6 × 10−5 𝑐𝑚
50. For what distance is ray optics a good approximation when the aperture is 4𝑚𝑚 wide and the wavelength
is 500 𝑛𝑚
a) 32 𝑚 b) 64 𝑚 c) 16 𝑚 d) 8 𝑚
51. Two waves having the intensities in the ratio of 9:1 produce interference. The ratio of maximum to
minimum intensity is equal to
a) 10: 8 b) 9:1 c) 4:1 d) 2:1
52. If the intensities of the two interfering beams in Young’s double alit experiment be 𝐼1 and 𝐼2 , then the
contrast between the maximum and minimum intensity is good when
a) 𝐼1 is much greater than 𝐼2 b) 𝐼1 is much smaller than 𝐼2
c) 𝐼1 = 𝐼2 d) Either 𝐼1 = 0 or 𝐼2 = 0
53. A wave is propagating in a medium of electric dielectric constant 2 and relative magnetic permeability 50.
The wave impedance of such a medium is
a) 5 Ω b) 376.6 Ω c) 1883 Ω d) 3776 Ω
54. Consider the following statements about electromagnetic waves and choose the correct ones
S1 : Electromagnetic waves having wavelengths 1000 times smaller than light waves are called 𝑋-rays
S2 : Ultraviolet waves are used in the treatment of swollen joints
S3 : Alpha and gamma rays are not electromagnetic waves
S4 : de Broglie waves are not electromagnetic in nature
S5 : Electromagnetic waves exhibit polarization while sound waves do not
a) S1, S4 and S5 b) S3, S4, and S5 c) S1, S3 and S5 d) S2, S3 and S4
55. A Young’s double slit experiment uses a monochromatic source. The shape of the interference fringes
formed on a screen is
 a) Hyperbola b) Circle c) Straight line d) Parabola
56. In a Fraunhofer diffraction experiment at a single slit using a light of wavelength 400 nm, the first
minimum is formed at an angle of 30°. The direction θ of the first secondary maximum is given by
2 3 1 2
a) sin−1 ( ) b) sin−1 ( ) c) sin−1 ( ) d) tan−1 ( )
3 4 4 3
57. 𝑉𝑜 and𝑉𝐸 represent the velocities, 𝜇𝑜 and 𝜇𝐸 the refractive indices of ordinary and extraordinary rays for a
doubly refracting crystal. Then
a) 𝑉𝑜 ≥ 𝑉𝐸 , 𝜇𝑜 ≤ 𝜇𝐸 if the crystal is calcite b) 𝑉𝑜 ≤ 𝑉𝐸 , 𝜇𝑜 ≤ 𝜇𝐸 if the crystal is quartz
c) 𝑉𝑜 ≤ 𝑉𝐸 , 𝜇𝑜 ≥ 𝜇𝐸 if the crystal is calcite d) 𝑉𝑜 ≥ 𝑉𝐸 , 𝜇𝑜 ≥ 𝜇𝐸 if the crystal is quartz
58. To demonstrate the phenomenon of interference we require two sources which emit radiations of
a) Nearly the same frequency
b) The same frequency
c) Different wavelength
d) The same frequency and having a definite phase relationship
59. In Young’s double slit experiment, first slit has width four times the width of the second slit. The ratio of
the maximum intensity to the minimum intensity in the interference fringe system is
a) 2 : 1 b) 4 : 1 c) 9 : 1 d) 8 : 1
60. Which of the following waves have the maximum wavelength
a) 𝑋-rays b) I.R. rays c) UV rays d) Radio waves
61. In Young’s experiment, one slit is covered with a blue filter and the other (slit) with a yellow filter. Then
the interference pattern
a) Will be blue b) Will be yellow c) Will be green d) Will not be formed
62. A slit of width 𝑎 is illuminated by red light of wavelength 6500Å. If the first minimum falls at θ = 30°, the
value of 𝑎 is
a) 6.5 × 10−4 mm b) 1.3 micron c) 3250Å d) 2.6 × 10−4 cm
63. In Young’s double slit experiment the wavelength of light was changed from 7000Åto 3500Å. While
doubling the separation between the slits which of the following is not true for this experiment
a) The width of the fringes changes
b) The colour of bright fringes changes
c) The separation between successive bright fringes changes
d) The separation between successive dark fringes remains unchanged
64. Which of the following is not electromagnetic in nature
a) 𝑋-rays b) Gamma rays c) Cathode rays d) Infrared rays
65. Interference may be seen using two independent
a) Sodium lamps b) Fluorescet tubes
c) Lasers d) Mercury vapour lamps
66. A mixture of light, consisting of wavelength 590 nm and an unknown wavelength, illuminates Young’s
double slit and gives rise to two overlapping interference patterns on the screen. The central maximum of
both lights coincide. Further, it is observed that the third bright fringe of known light coincides with the
4th bright fringe of the unknown light. From this data, the wavelength of the unknown light is
a) 393.4 nm b) 885.0 nm c) 442.5 nm d) 776.8 nm
67. If white light is used in the Newton’s rings experiment, the colour observed in the reflected light is
complementary to that observed in the transmitted light through the same point. This is due to
a) 90° change of phase in one of the reflected waves
b) 180° change of phase in one of the reflected waves
c) 145° change of phase in one of the reflected waves
d) 45° change of phase in one of the reflected waves
68. Energy stored in electromagnetic oscillations is in the form of
a) Electrical energy b) Magnetic energy c) Both (a) and (b) d) None of these
69. In the visible region of the spectrum the rotation of the plane of polarization is given by 𝜃 = 𝑎 + 𝑏 . The
𝜆2
 optical rotation produced by a particular material is found to be 30° 𝑝𝑒𝑟 𝑚𝑚 at 𝜆 = 5000Å and
50°𝑝𝑒𝑟 𝑚𝑚at 𝜆 = 4000Å. The value of constant 𝑎 will be
50° 50° 9° 9°
a) + 𝑝𝑒𝑟 𝑚𝑚 b) − 𝑝𝑒𝑟 𝑚𝑚 c) + 𝑝𝑒𝑟 𝑚𝑚 d) − 𝑝𝑒𝑟 𝑚𝑚
9 9 50 50
70. Evidence for the wave nature of light cannot be obtained from
a) Reflection b) Doppler effect c) Interference d) Diffraction
71. The phase difference between incident wave and reflected wave is 180° when light ray
a) Enters into glass from air b) Enters into air from glass
c) Enters into glass from diamond d) Enters into water from glass
72. In Young’s double slit experiment, a glass plate is placed before a slit which absorbs half the intensity of
light. Under this case
a) The brightness of fringes decreases
b) The fringe width decreases
c) No fringes will be observed
d) The bright fringes become fainter and the dark fringes have finite light intensity
73. Wavefront means
a) All particles in it have same phase
b) All particles have opposite phase of vibrations
c) Few particles are in same phase, rest are in opposite phase
d) None of these
74. The average magnetic energy density of an electromagnetic wave of wavelength 𝜆 travelling in free space
is given by
𝐵2 𝐵2 2𝐵2 𝐵
a) b) c) d)
2𝜆 2𝜇0 𝜇0 𝜆 𝜇0 𝜆
75. A ray of light strikes a glass plate at an angle of60°. If the reflected an refracted rays are perpendicular to
each other, the index of refraction of glass is
1 3 3
a) b) √ c) d) 1.732
2 2 2
76. An electromagnetic wave going through vacuum is described by 𝐸 = 𝐸0 sin(𝑘𝑥 − 𝜔𝑡); 𝐵 = 𝐵0 sin(𝑘𝑥 −
𝜔𝑡). Which of the following equations is true
a) 𝐸0 𝑘 = 𝐵0 𝜔 b) 𝐸0 𝜔 = 𝐵0 𝑘 c) 𝐸0 𝐵0 = 𝜔𝑘 d) None of these
77. In Young’s double slit experiment we get 60 fringes in the field of view of monochromatic light of
wavelength 4000Å. If we use monochromatic light of wavelength 6000 Å, then the number of fringes
obtained in the same field of view are
a) 60 b) 90 c) 40 d) 1.5
78. An unpolarised beam of intensity 𝐼0 is incident on a pair of nicols making an angle of 60° with each other.
The intensity of light emerging from the pair is
a) 𝐼0 b) 𝐼0 /2 c) 𝐼0 /4 d) 𝐼0 /8
79. What is ozone hole
a) Hole in the ozone layer b) Formation of ozone layer
c) Thinning of ozone layer in troposphere d) Reduction in ozone thickness in stratosphere
80. Which of the following is electromagnetic wave
a) 𝑋-rays and light waves b) Cosmic rays and sound waves
c) Beta rays and sound waves d) Alpha rays and sound waves
81. Two coherent sources of intensity ratio 1:4 produce an interference pattern. The fringe visibility will be
a) 1 b) 0.8 c) 0.4 d) 0.6
82. A single slit is used to observe diffraction pattern with red light. On replacing the red light with violet light
the diffraction pattern would
a) Remain unchanged b) Become narrower c) Become broader d) Disappear
83. Unpolarised light falls on two polarizing sheets placed one on top of the other. What must be the angle
 between the characteristic directions of the sheets if the intensity of the final transmitted light is one-third
the maximum intensity of the first transmitted beam
a) 75° b) 55° c) 35° d) 15°
84. The idea of the quantum nature of light has emerged in an attempt to explain
a) Interference b) Diffraction
c) Radiation spectrum of a black body d) Polarization
85. A new system of units is evolved in which the values of 𝜇0 and 𝜖0 are 2 and 8 respectively. Then the speed
of light in this system will be
a) 0.25 b) 0.5 c) 0.75 d) 1
86. In Young’s double slit experiment, the 8𝑡ℎ maximum with wavelength 𝜆1 is at a distance 𝑑1 from the
central maximum and the 6𝑡ℎ maximum with a wavelength 𝜆2 is at a distance 𝑑2 . Then (𝑑1 /𝑑2 ) is equal to
4 𝜆2 4 𝜆1 3 𝜆2 3 𝜆1
a) ( ) b) ( ) c) ( ) d) ( )
3 𝜆1 3 𝜆2 4 𝜆1 4 𝜆2
87. In Young’s double slit experiment, the distance between the two slits is made half, then the fringe width
will become
a) Half b) Double c) One fourth d) Unchanged
88. The phenomenon which does not take place in sound waves is
a) Scattering b) Diffraction c) Interference d) Polarisation
89. A mixture of light, consisting of wavelength 590 𝑛𝑚 and an unknown wavelength, illuminates Young’s
double slit and gives rise to two overlapping interference patterns on the screen. The central maximum of
both lights coincide. Further, it is observed that the third bright fringe of known light coincides with the
4th bright fringe of unknown light. From this data, the wavelength of the unknown light is
a) 393.4 𝑛𝑚 b) 885.0 𝑛𝑚 c) 442.5 𝑛𝑚 d) 776.8 𝑛𝑚
90. In an interference experiment, third bright fringes are obtained at a point on the screen with a light of 700
nm. What should be the wavelength of the light source in order to obtain 5th bright fringe at the same
point?
a) 630 nm b) 500 nm c) 420 nm d) 750 nm
91. Which of the following is not a property of light
a) It requires a material medium for propagation
b) It can travel through vacuum
c) It involves transportation of energy
d) It has finite speed
92. In a Young’s double slit experiment, distance between sources is 1 mm and distance between the screen
and sources is 1 m. If the fringe width on the screen is 0.06 cm, then 𝜆 is
a) 6000 Å b) 4000 Å c) 1200 Å d) 2400 Å
93. A star is moving away from the earth with a velocity of 100 𝑘𝑚/𝑠. If the velocity of light is 3 × 108 𝑚/𝑠
then the shift of its spectral line of wavelength 5700 Å due to Doppler’s effect will be
a) 0.63Å b) 1.90Å c) 3.80Å d) 5.70Å
94. In Young’s double slit experiment, the aperture screen distance is 2 m. The slit width is 1 mm. Light of
600 nm is used. If a thin plate of glass (𝜇 − 1.5) of thickness 0.06 mm is placed over one of the slits, then
there will be a lateral displacement of the fringes by
a) Zero b) 6 cm c) 10 cm d) 15 cm
95. In the Young’s double slit experiment, the central maxima are observed to be𝐼0 . If one of the slits is
covered, then the intensity at the central maxima will become
𝐼0 𝐼0 𝐼0
a) b) c) d) 𝐼0
2 √2 4
96. Brewster’s angle in terms of refractive index (𝑛) of the medium
a) tan−1 [√𝑛] b) sin−1[𝑛] c) sin−1[√𝑛] d) tan−1 [𝑛]
97. A slit of width aisilluminated with a monochromatic light of wavelength 𝜆 from a distant source and the
diffraction pattern is observed on a screen placed at a distance Dfrom the slit. To increase the width of the
 central maximum one should
a) Decrease D b) Decrease 𝑎
c) Decrease 𝜆 d) The width cannot be changed
98. Consider the following statements in case of Young’s double slit experiment.
I. A slit S is necessary if we use an ordinary extended source of light.
II. A slit S is not needed if we use an ordinary but well collimated beam of light.
III. A slit S is not needed if we use a spetially coherent source of light.
Which of the above statement are correct?
a) (i)And (iii) b) (ii) and (iii) c) (i)and (ii) d) (i), (b) and (iii)
99. In a two slit experiment with monochromatic light fringes are obtained on a screen placed at some
distance from the slits. If the screen is moved by 5 × 10−2 m towards the slits, the charge in fringe width is
3 × 10−5 m. If separation between the slits is 10−3 m, the wavelength of light used is
a) 6000 Å b) 5000 Å c) 3000 Å d) 4500 Å
100. Direction of the first secondary maximum in the Fraunhoffer diffraction pattern at a single slit is given by
(𝑎 is the width of the slit)
𝜆 3𝜆 3𝜆
a) 𝑎 sin 𝜃 = b) 𝑎 cos 𝜃 = c) 𝑎 sin 𝜃 = 𝜆 d) 𝑎 sin 𝜃 =
2 2 2
101. In a Young’ s double slit experiment, the intensity at a point where the path difference
𝜆
is where(λ is wavelength of the light) is 𝐼. I f 𝐼0 denotes the maximum intensity, then
6
𝐼
𝐼0
is equal to
1 √3 1 3
a) b) c) d)
2 2 √2 4
102. A beam with wavelength 𝜆 falls on a stack of partially reflecting planes with separation 𝑑. The angle 𝜃 that
the beam should make with the planes so that the beams reflected from successive planes may interfere
constructively is (where 𝑛 = 1, 2, … …)

𝑛𝜆 𝑛𝜆 𝑛𝜆 𝑛𝜆
a) sin−1 ( ) b) tan−1 ( ) c) sin−1 ( ) d) cos −1 ( )
𝑑 𝑑 2𝑑 2𝑑
103. S1 And S2 are two coherent sources. The intensity of both sources are same. If the intensity at the point of
maxima is 4 Wm−2 , the intensity of each source is
a) 1 Wm−2 b) 2 Wm−2 c) 3 Wm−2 d) 4 Wm−2
104. A single slit Fraunhofer diffraction pattern is formed with white light. For what wavelength of light the
third secondary maximum in the diffraction pattern coincides with the second secondary maximum in the
pattern for red light of wavelength 6500Å?
a) 4400 Å b) 4100 Å c) 4642.8 Å d) 9100 Å
105. In diffraction from a single slit, the angular width of the central maxima does not depend on
a) 𝜆 of light used
b) Width of slit
c) Distance of slits from screen
d) Ratio of 𝜆 and slit width
106. The Young’s double slit experiment is performed with blue and with green light of wavelength 4360 Å and
5460 Å respectively. If 𝑥 is the distance of 4th maxima from the central one, then
a) 𝑥 (blue) = 𝑥(green) b) 𝑥 (blue) > 𝑥 (green)
c) 𝑥 (blue) < 𝑥 (green) d) 𝑥 (blue)/𝑥(green) = 5400/4360
107. TV waves have a wavelength range of 1-10 𝑚𝑒𝑡𝑒𝑟. Their frequency range in 𝑀𝐻𝑧 is
 a) 30-300 b) 3-30 c) 300-3000 d) 3-3000
108. 𝜆𝑎 and 𝜆𝑚 are the wavelength of a beam of light in air and medium respectively. If θ is the polarising angle,
the correct relation between 𝜆𝑎 , 𝜆𝑚 and θ is
a) 𝜆𝑎 = 𝜆𝑚 tan2 θ b) 𝜆𝑚 = 𝜆𝑎 tan2 θ c) 𝜆𝑎 = 𝜆𝑚 cot θ d) 𝜆𝑚 = 𝜆𝑎 cot θ
109. Which of the following cannot be polarized?
a) Ultraviolet rays b) Ultrasonic waves c) X-rays d) Radiowaves
110. In a biprism experiment, 5 dark fringe is obtained at a point. If a thin transparent film is placed in the
th

path of one of waves, then 7th bright fringes is obtained at the same point. The thickness of the film in
terms of wavelength 𝑙 and refractive index 𝜇 will be
1.5𝜆 2.5𝜆
a) b) 1.5(𝜇 − 1)𝜆 c) 2.5(𝜇 − 1)𝜆 d)
(𝜇 − 1) (𝜇 − 1)
111. The wavelength of the matter waves is independent of
a) Charge b) Momentum c) Velocity d) Mass
112. The graph showing the dependence of intensity of transmitted light on the angle between polarizer and
analyser, is

a) b) c) d)

113. In young’s double slit experiment 𝑑 = 10−4 (𝑑 =distance between slits, 𝐷=distance of screen from the
𝐷
slits). At a point 𝑃 on the screen resultant intensity is equal to the intensity due to the individual slit𝐼0 .
Then the distance of point 𝑃 from the central maximum is (𝜆 = 6000 Å)
a) 0.5 mm b) 2 mm c) 1 mm d) 4 mm
114. If white light is used in the Newton’s rings experiment, the colour observed in the reflected light is
complementary to that observed in the transmitted light is complementary to that observed in the
transmitted light through the same point. This is due to
a) 90° change of phase in one of the reflected waves
b) 180° change of phase in one of the reflected waves
c) 145° change of phase in one of the reflected waves
d) 45° change of phase in one of the reflected waves
115. In Fresnel’s biprism(𝜇 = 1.5) experiment the distance between source and biprism is 0.3 𝑚 and that
between biprism and screen is 0.7𝑚 and angle of prism is 1°. The fringe width with light of wavelength
6000 Å will be
a) 3 𝑐𝑚 b) 0.011 𝑐𝑚 c) 2 𝑐𝑚 d) 4 𝑐𝑚
116. Two light sources are said to be coherent if they are obtained from
a) Two independent point sources emitting light of the same wavelength
b) A single point source
c) A wide source
d) Two ordinary bulbs emitting light of different wavelengths
117. When the angle of incidence on a material is 60°, the reflected light is completely polarized. The velocity
of the refracted ray inside the material is (in ms−1 )
3
a) 3 × 108 b) [ ] × 108 c) √3 × 108 d) 0.5 × 108
√2
118. A beam of light of wavelength 600 nm from a distant source falls on a single slit 1 mm wide and the
resulting diffraction pattern is observed on a screen 2 m away. The distance between the first dark fringes
on either side of the central bright fringe is
a) 1.2 cm b) 1.2 mm c) 2.4 cm d) 2.4 mm
119. Frequency of wave is 6 × 1015 𝐻𝑧. The wave is
a) Radiowave b) Microwave c) X-ray d) None of these
120. Oil floating on water looks coloured due to interference of light. What should be the order of magnitude of
thickness of oil layer in order that this effect may be observed?
a) 10,000 Å b) 1 cm c) 10 Å d) 100 Å
121. A point source of electromagnetic radiation has an average power output of 800 𝑊. The maximum value of
electric field at a distance 4.0 𝑚 from the source is
a) 64.7 𝑉/𝑚 b) 57.8 𝑉/𝑚 c) 56.72 𝑉/𝑚 d) 54.77 𝑉/𝑚
122. In an electromagnetic wave, the amplitude of electric field is 1 𝑉/𝑚, the frequency of wave is 5 × 1014 𝐻𝑧.
The wave is propagating along 𝑧-axis. The average energy density of electric field, in 𝐽𝑜𝑢𝑙𝑒/𝑚 3, will be
a) 1.1 × 10−11 b) 2.2 × 10−12 c) 3.3 × 10−13 d) 4.4 × 10−14
123. In the Young’s double slit experiment, the spacing between two slits is 0.1 𝑚𝑚. If the screen is kept at a
distance of 1.0 𝑚 from the slits and wavelength of light is 5000 Å, then the fringe width is
a) 1.0𝑐𝑚 b) 1.5𝑐𝑚 c) 0.5𝑐𝑚 d) 2.0𝑐𝑚
124. Which of the following diagrams represent the variation of electric field vector with time for a circularly
polarized light

a) b) c) d)

125. In a diffraction pattern by a wire, on increasing diameter of wire, fringe width

a) Decreases b) Increases
c) Remains unchanged d) Increasing or decreasing will depend on
wavelength
126. Light if wavelength 2 × 10 m falls on a slit of width 4 × 10−3 m. The angular dispersion of the central
−3

maximum will be
a) 30° b) 60° c) 90° d) 180°
127. The intensity of gamma radiation from a given source is 𝐼. On passing through 36 𝑚𝑚 of lead, it is reduced
𝐼 𝐼
to . The thickness of lead which will reduce the intensity to will be
8 2
a) 18 𝑚𝑚 b) 12 𝑚𝑚 c) 6 𝑚𝑚 d) 9 𝑚𝑚
128. In the Young’s double slit experiment, a mica slip of thickness 𝑡 and refractive index 𝜇 is introduced in the
ray from first source𝑆1 . By how much distance fringes pattern will be displaced.
𝑑 𝐷 𝑑 𝐷
a) (𝜇 − 1)𝑡 b) (𝜇 − 1)𝑡 c) d) (𝜇 − 1)
𝐷 𝑑 (𝜇−1 𝐷) 𝑑
129. In a biprism experiment, by using light of wavelength5000 Å, 5mm wide fringes are obtained on a screen
1.0 m away from the coherent sources. The separation between the two coherent sources is
a) 1.0 mm b) 0.1 mm c) 0.05 mm d) 0.01 mm
130. In Young’s double slit experiment, an interference pattern is obtained on a screen by a light of wavelength
6000Å coming from the coherent sources 𝑆1 and 𝑆2 . At certain point P on the screen third dark fringe is
formed. Then the path difference 𝑆1 𝑃 − 𝑆2 𝑃 in microns is
a) 0.75 b) 1.5 c) 3.0 d) 4.5
131. A beam of plane polarized light falls normally on a polarizer of cross sectional area 3 × 10−4 𝑚 2. Flux of
energy of incident ray in 10−3 𝑊. The polarizer rotates with an angular frequency of 31.4 𝑟𝑎𝑑/𝑠. The
energy of light passing through the polarizer per revolution will be
a) 10−4 𝐽𝑜𝑢𝑙𝑒 b) 10−3 𝐽𝑜𝑢𝑙𝑒 c) 10−2 𝐽𝑜𝑢𝑙𝑒 d) 10−1 𝐽𝑜𝑢𝑙𝑒
132. In a wave, the path difference corresponding to a phase difference of 𝜙 is
𝜋 𝜋 𝜆 𝜆
a) 𝜙 b) 𝜙 c) 𝜙 d) 𝜙
2𝜆 𝜆 2𝜋 𝜋
133. Which one of the following property of light does not support wave theory of light?
a) Light obeys laws of reflection and refraction
b) Light waves get polarized
c) Light shows photoelectric effect
d) Light shows interference
134. Light waves travel in vacuum along the 𝑦– axis. Which of the following may represent the wavefront?
a) 𝑦 = constant b) 𝑥 = constant c) 𝑧 = constant d) 𝑥 + 𝑦 + 𝑧 = constant
135. In the given arrangement, 𝑆1 and 𝑆2 are coherent sources (shown in figure). The point P is a point of

a) Bright fringe b) Dark fringe c) Either dark or light d) None of the above
136. A wavefront presents one, two and three HPZ at points 𝐴, 𝐵 and 𝐶 respectively. If the ratio of consecutive
amplitudes of HPZ is 4 : 3, then the ratio of resultant intensities at these point will be
a) 169 : 16 : 256 b) 256 : 16 : 169 c) 256 : 16 : 196 d) 256 : 196 : 16
137. Irreducible phase difference in any wave of 5000 Å from a source of light is
a) 𝜋 b) 12𝜋 c) 12𝜋 × 106 d) 𝜋 × 106
138. In Young’s double slit experiment, the slits are 3 mm apart. The wavelength of light used is 5000 Å and the
distance between the slits and the screen is 90 cm. The fringe width in 9 (mm) is
a) 1.5 b) 0.015 c) 2.0 d) 0.15
139. The figure here gives the electric field of an EM wave at a certain point and a certain instant. The wave is
transporting energy in the negative 𝑧 direction. What is the direction of the magnetic field of the wave at
that point and instant
Y

E

a) Towards + 𝑋 direction b) Towards −𝑋 direction

c) Towards + 𝑍 direction d) Towards −𝑍 direction
140. Two polaroids are kept crossed to each other. Now one of them us rotated through an angle of 45°. The
percentage of incident light now transmitted through the system is
a) 15% b) 25% c) 50% d) 60%
141. If a source of light is moving away from a stationary observer, then the frequency of light wave appears to
change because of
a) Doppler’s effect b) Interference c) Diffraction d) None of these
142. In a Young’s double slit experiment, the fringe width will remain same, if (𝐷 = distance between screen
and plane of slits, 𝑑 = separation between two slits and 𝜆 = wavelength of light used)
a) Both 𝜆 and 𝐷 are doubled b) Both 𝑑 and 𝐷 are doubled
c) 𝐷 is doubled but 𝑑 is halved d) 𝜆 is doubled but 𝑑 is halved
143. Two parallel slits 0.6 𝑚𝑚 apart are illuminated by light source of wavelength 6000 Å. The distance
between two consecutive dark fringes on a screen 1 𝑚 away from the slits is
a) 1 𝑚𝑚 b) 0.01 𝑚𝑚 c) 0.1 𝑚 d) 10 𝑚
144. A single slit Fraunhoffer diffraction pattern is formed with white light. For what wavelength of light the
third secondary maximum in the diffraction pattern coincides with the second secondary maximum in the
pattern for red light of wavelength 6500 Å
a) 4400 Å b) 4100 Å c) 4642.8 Å d) 9100 Å
145. Consider the following statements A and B and identify the correct answer.
 A. Fresnel’s diffraction pattern occurs when the source of light or the screen on which the diffraction
pattern is seen or when both are at finite distance from the aperture.
B. Diffracted light can be used to estimate the helical structure of nucleic acids.
a) A and B are true b) A and B are false
c) A is true but B is false d) A is false but B is true
146. In a Young’s double slit experiment, the separation between the two slits is 0.9 mm and the fringes are
observed 1 m away. If it produces the second dark fringes at a distance of 1 mm from the central fringe,
the wavelength of the monochromatic source of light used is
a) 450 nm b) 400 nm c) 5002 nm d) 600 nm
147. In a Young’s experiment, two coherent sources are placed 0.90 mm apart and the finges are observed one
metre away. If it produces the second dark fringe at a distance of 1 mm from the central fringe, the
wavelength of monochromatic light used would be
a) 60 × 10−4 cm b) 10 × 10−4 cm c) 10 × 10−5 cm d) 6 × 10−5 cm
148. Through which character we can distinguish the light waves from sound waves
a) Interference b) Refraction c) Polarization d) Reflection
149. In Young’s double slit experiment, the separation between the slit and the screen increases. The fringe
width
a) Increases b) Decreases c) Remains unchanged d) None of these
150. The 𝑘 line of singly ionized calcium has a wavelength of 393.3 𝑛𝑚 as measured on earth. In the spectrum
of one of the observed galaxies, this spectral line is located at 401.8 𝑛𝑚. The speed with which the galaxy is
moving away from us, will be
a) 6480 𝑘𝑚/𝑠 b) 3240 𝑘𝑚/𝑠 c) 4240 𝑘𝑚/𝑠 d) None of these
151. A radio receiver antenna that is 2 𝑚 long is oriented along the direction of the electromagnetic wave and
receives a signal of intensity 5 × 10−16 𝑊/𝑚 2. The maximum instantaneous potential difference across the
two ends of the antenna is
a) 1.23 𝜇𝑉 b) 1.23 𝑚𝑉 c) 1.23 𝑉 d) 12.3 𝑚𝑉
152. The two slits are 1𝑚𝑚 apart from each other and illuminated with a light of wavelength 5 × 10−7 𝑚. If the
distance of the screen is 1 𝑚 from the slits, then the distance between third dark fringe and fifth bright
fringe is
a) 1.5 𝑚𝑚 b) 0.75 𝑚𝑚 c) 1.25 𝑚𝑚 d) 0.625 𝑚𝑚
153. In Young’s double slit experiment, distance between two sources is 0.1 mm. The distance of screen from
the source is 20 cm. Wavelength of light used is 5460 Åhen angular position of first dark fringe is
a) 0.08° b) 0.16° c) 0.20° d) 0.32°
154. The maximum distance upto which TV transmission from a TV tower of height ℎ can be received is
proportional to
a) ℎ1/2 b) ℎ c) ℎ d) ℎ 2
155. In Young’s double slit experiment, the intensity on the screen at a point where path difference 𝜆is 𝐾. What
will be the intensity at the point where path difference is 𝜆/4
𝐾 𝐾 d) Zero
a) b) c) 𝐾
4 2
156. In Young’s double slit experiment, the separation between the slit is haled and the distance between the
slits and screen is doubled. The fringe-width will
a) Be halved b) Be doubled
c) Be quadrupled d) Remain unchanged
157. The distance between the first dark and bright band formed in Young’s double slit experiment with band
width B is
𝐵 b) B 𝐵 3𝐵
a) c) d)
4 2 2
158. Which of the following statements indicates that light waves are transverse
a) Light waves can travel in vacuum b) Light waves show interference
c) Light waves can be polarized d) Light waves can be diffracted
159. In Young’s double slit experiment, the central bright fringe can be identified
a) As it has greater intensity than the other bright fringes
b) As it is wider than the other bright fringes
c) As it is narrower than the other bright fringes
d) By using white light instead of monochromatic light
160. The observed wavelength of light coming from a distant galaxy is found to be increased by 0.5% as
compared with that coming from a terrestrial source. The galaxy is
a) Stationary with respect to the earth
b) Approaching the earth with velocity of light
c) Receding from the earth with the velocity of light
d) Receding from the earth with a velocity equal to 1.5 × 106 𝑚/𝑠
161. In Fresnel’s biprism experiment is held in water instead of air, then what will be the effect on fringe width
a) Decreases b) Increases c) No effect d) None of these
162. The radiation pressure (in 𝑁/𝑚 ) of the visible light is of the order of
2

a) 10−2 b) 10−4 c) 10−6 d) 10−8

163. Two stars are situated at a distance of 8 light year from the earth. These are to be just resolved by a
telescope of diameter 0.25 m. If the wavelength of light used is 5000Å, then the distance between the stars
must be
a) 3 × 1010 m b) 3.35 × 1011 m c) 1.95 × 1011 m d) 4.32 × 1010 m
164. In Young’s double slit experiment, one of the slit is wider than other, so that amplitude of the light from
one slit is double of that from other slit. If 𝐼𝑚 be the maximum intensity, the resultant intensity I when they
interfere at phase difference 𝜙 is given by
𝐼𝑚 𝐼𝑚 𝜙 𝐼𝑚 𝜙 𝐼𝑚 𝜙
a) (4 + 5 cos 𝜙) b) (1 + 2 cos2 ) c) (1 + 4 cos2 ) d) (1 + 8 cos2 )
9 3 2 5 2 9 2
165. Air has refractive index 1.0003. The thickness of air column, which will have one more wavelength of
yellow light (6000Å) than in the same thickness of vacuum is
a) 2 𝑚𝑚 b) 2 𝑐𝑚 c) 2 𝑚 d) 2 𝑘𝑚
166. In Young’s double slit experiment, the 7 maximum wavelength 𝜆1 is at a distance 𝑑1 and that with
th

wavelength 𝜆2 is at a distance 𝑑2 .Then (𝑑1 /𝑑2 ) is

a) (𝜆1 /𝜆2 ) b) (𝜆2 /𝜆1 ) c) (𝜆12 /𝜆22 ) d) (𝜆22 /𝜆21 )
167. The angular resolution of a 10 cm diameter telescope at a wavelength of 5000Å is of the order of
a) 106 rad b) 10−2 rad c) 10−4 rad d) 10−6 rad
168. What is the path difference of destructive interference
(𝑛 + 1)𝜆 (2𝑛 + 1)𝜆
a) 𝑛𝜆 b) 𝑛(𝜆 + 1) c) d)
2 2
169. A beam of electron is used in an 𝑌𝐷𝑆𝐸 experiment. The slit width is d. When the velocity of electron is
increased, then
a) No interference is observed b) Fringe width increases
c) Fringe width decreases d) Fringe width remains same
170. In Young’s double slit experiment, angular width of fringes is 0.20° for sodium light of wavelength 5890 Å.
If complete system is dipped in water, then angular width of fringes becomes
a) 0.11° b) 0.15° c) 0.22° d) 0.30°
171. As a result of interference of two coherent sources of light energy is
a) Redistributed and the distribution does not very with time
b) Increased
c) Redistributed and that distribution changes with time
d) Decreased
172. In Young’s double slit experiment, if one of the slits is closed fully, then in the interference pattern
a) A bright slit will be observed, no interference pattern will exist
b) The bright fringes will become more bright
 c) The bright fringes will become fainter
d) None of the above
173. If a transparent medium of refractive index 𝜇 = 1.5 and thickness 𝑡 = 2.5 × 10−5 𝑚 is inserted in front of
one of the slits of Young’s Double Slit experiment, how much will be the shift in the interference pattern?
The distance between the slits is 0.5 𝑚𝑚 and that between slits and screen is 100 𝑐𝑚
a) 5 𝑐𝑚 b) 2.5 𝑐𝑚 c) 0.25 𝑐𝑚 d) 0.1 𝑐𝑚
174. A beam of light of wavelength 600 nm from a distance source falls on a single slit 1.00 mm wide and the
resulting diffraction pattern is observed on a screen 2m away. The distance between the first dark fringes
on either side of the central bright fringe is
a) 1.2 cm b) 1.2 mm c) 2.4 cm d) 2.4 mm
175. A light wave is incident normally over a slit of width 24 × 10 𝑐𝑚. The angular position of second dark
−5

fringe from the central maxima is 30°. What is the wavelength of light
a) 6000 Å b) 5000 Å c) 3000 Å d) 1500 Å
176. If the eighth bright band due to light of wavelength 𝜆1 coincides with ninth bright band from light of
wavelength 𝜆2 in Young’s double slit experiment, then the possible wavelength of visible light are
a) 400 𝑛𝑚 and 450 𝑛𝑚 b) 425 𝑛𝑚 and 400 𝑛𝑚 c) 400 𝑛𝑚 and 425 𝑛𝑚 d) 450 𝑛𝑚 and 400 𝑛𝑚
177. Light of wavelength 6000 Å falls on a single slit of width 0.1 mm. The second minimum will be formed for
the angle of diffraction of
a) 0.08 rad b) 0.06 rad c) 0.12 rad d) 0.012 rad
178. In double slit experiment, the angular width of the fringes is 0.20° for the sodium light (𝜆 = 5890Å). In
Order to increase the angular width of the fringes by 10%, the necessary change in the wavelength is
a) Increase of 589 Å b) Decrease of 589 Å c) Increase of 6479 Å d) Zero
179. Yellow light is used in single slit diffraction experiment with slit width 0.6 𝑚𝑚. If yellow light is replaced
by 𝑋- rays then the pattern will reveal
a) That the central maxima is narrower b) No diffraction pattern
c) More number of fringes d) Less number of fringes
180. In a double slit interference experiment, the distance between the slits is 0.05 cm and screen is 2 m away
from the slits. The wavelength of light is 8.0 × 10−5 cm. The distance between successive fringes is
a) 0.24 cm b) 3.2 cm c) 1.28 cm d) 0.32 cm
181. The angle of incidence at which reflected light is totally polarized for reflection from air to glass (refractive
index 𝑛) is
1 1
a) sin−1(𝑛) b) sin−1 ( ) c) tan−1 ( ) d) tan−1 (𝑛)
𝑛 𝑛
182. Unpolarized light of intensity 32𝑊𝑚 −2 passes through three polarizers such that transmission axes of the
first and second polarizer makes an angle 30° with each other and the transmission axis of the last
polarizer is crossed with that of the first. The intensity of final emerging light will be
a) 32 𝑊𝑚 −2 b) 3 𝑊𝑚 −2 c) 8 𝑊𝑚 −2 d) 4 𝑊𝑚 −2
183. In the given figure, C is middle point of line𝑆1 𝑆2 . A monochromatic light of wavelength 𝜆 is incident on slits.
The ratio intensity of 𝑆3 and 𝑆4 is

a) Zero b) ∞ c) 4:1 d) 1:4

184. Which of the following cannot be explained on the basis of wave nature of light?
IV. Polarization
V. Optical activity
 VI. Photoelectric effect
VII. Compton effect
a) (iii) and (iv) b) (ii) and (iii) c) (i)and (iii) d) (ii) and (iv)
185. A slit 5 cm wide is irradiated normally with microwaves of wavelength 1.0 cm. Then the angular spread of
the central maximum on either side if incident light is nearly
a) 1/5 rad b) 4 rad c) 5 rad d) 6 rad
186. Intensities of the two waves of light are 𝐼and 4𝐼. The maximum intensity of the resultant wave after
superposition is
a) 5 𝐼 b) 9 𝐼 c) 16 𝐼 d) 25 𝐼
187. The bending of beam of light around corners of obstacles is called
a) Reflection b) Diffraction c) Refraction d) Interference
188. The ratio of maximum and minimum intensities of two sources is 4 :1. The ratio of their amplitudes is
a) 1 : 3 b) 3 : 1 c) 1 : 9 d) 1 : 16
189. In Young’s double slit experiment, the distance between slits is 0.0344 mm. The wavelength of light used is
600 mm. what is the angular width of a fringe formed on a distant screen?
a) 1° b) 2° c) 3° d) 4°
190. A beam of electron is used in an YDSE experiment. The slit width is d. When the velocity of electron is
increased, then
a) No interference is observed
b) Fringe width increases
c) Fringe width decreases
d) Fringe width remains same
191. At two points 𝑃 and 𝑄 on screen in Young's double slit experiment. Waves from slits
𝜆
𝑆1 and 𝑆2 have a path difference of 0 and 4 respectively. The ratio of intensities at
P and Q will be
a) 3 ∶ 2 b) 2 ∶ 1 c) √2 ∶ 1 d) 4 ∶ 1
192. Wave nature of light follows because
a) Light rays travel in a straight line
b) Light exhibits the phenomena of reflection and refraction
c) Light exhibits the phenomena of interference
d) Light causes the phenomena of photoelectric effect
193. The angular width of the central maximum of the diffraction pattern in a single slit (of width ′𝑎′)
experiment, with 𝜆 as the wavelength of light is
3𝜆 𝜆 2𝜆 𝜆
a) b) c) d)
2𝑎 2𝑎 𝑎 𝑎
194. In Young’s double slit experiment, if monochromatic light is replaced by white light
a) All bright fringes become white
b) All bright fringes have colours between violet and red
c) Only the central fringe is white, all other fringes are coloured
d) No fringes are observed
195. In Young’s experiment, the distance between slits is 0.28 𝑚𝑚 and distance between slits and screen is
1.4 𝑚. Distance between central bright fringe and third bright fringe is 0.9 𝑐𝑚. What is the wavelength of
used light
a) 5000 Å b) 6000 Å c) 7000 Å d) 9000 Å
196. In a Young’s double slit experiment(slit distance d) monochromatic light of
wavelength 𝜆is used and the fringe pattern observed at a distance 𝐿 from the slits.
The angular position of the bright fringes are
1 1
𝑛𝜆 (𝑛 + ) 𝜆 𝑛𝜆 (𝑛 + ) 𝜆
2 2
a) sin −1
( ) b) sin −1
( ) c) sin −1
( ) d) sin −1
( )
𝑑 𝑑 𝐿 𝐿
197. 𝑛 coherent source of intensity 𝐼0 are superimposed at a point, the intensity of the point is
𝐼0 d) None of these
a) 𝑛𝐼0 b) c) 𝑛2 𝐼0
𝑛
198. When a compact disc is illuminated by small source of white light, coloured bands are observed. This is
due to
a) Dispersion b) Diffraction c) Interference d) Reflection
199. If Young’s double slit experiment, is performed in water
a) The fringe width will decrease b) The fringe width will increase
c) The fringe width will remain unchanged d) There will be no fringe
200. For the constructive interference the path difference between the two interfering waves must be equal to
𝜆
a) (2𝑛 + 1)𝜆 b) 2𝑛𝜋 c) 𝑛𝜆 d) (2𝑛 + 1)
2
201. In the adjacent diagram, 𝐶𝑃 represents a wavefront and 𝐴𝑂 and 𝐵𝑃, the corresponding two rays. Find the
condition on θ for constructive interference at P between the ray 𝐵𝑃and reflected ray 𝑂𝑃

3𝜆 𝜆 𝜆 4𝜆
a) cos θ = b) cos θ = c) sec θ − cos θ = d) sec θ − cos 𝜃 =
2𝑑 4𝑑 𝑑 𝑑
202. In two separate set-ups of the Young’s double slit experiment, fringes of equal width are observed when
lights of wavelengths in the ratio 1:2 are used. If the ratio of the slit separation in the two cases is 2 : 1, the
ratio of the distances between the plane of the slits and the screen in the two set-ups is
a) 4 : 1 b) 1 : 1 c) 1 : 4 d) 2 : 1
203. A beam of circularly polarised light us completely absorbed by an object on which it falls. If 𝑈 represents
absorbed energy and 𝜔 represents angular frequency, then angular momentum transferred to the object is
given by
𝑈 𝑈 𝑈 2𝑈
a) 2 b) c) d)
𝜔 2𝜔 𝜔 𝜔
204. In an interference experiment, the spacing between successive maxima or minima is
a) 𝜆𝑑/𝐷 b) 𝜆𝐷/𝑑 c) 𝑑𝐷/𝜆 d) 𝜆𝑑/4𝐷
205. A light has amplitude 𝐴 and angle between analyser and polarizer is 60°. Light is reflected by analyser has
amplitude
a) 𝐴√2 b) 𝐴/√2 c) √3𝐴/2 d) 𝐴/2
206. In Young’s double slit experiment, the wavelength of the light used is doubled and distance between two
slits is half of initial distance, the resultant fringe width becomes
a) 2 𝑡𝑖𝑚𝑒𝑠 b) 3 𝑡𝑖𝑚𝑒𝑠 c) 4 𝑡𝑖𝑚𝑒𝑠 d) 1/2 𝑡𝑖𝑚𝑒𝑠
207. The maximum intensity of fringes in Young’s experiment is 𝐼. If one of the slit is closed, then the intensity
at that place becomes 𝐼𝑜 . Which of the following relation is true
a) 𝐼 = 𝐼𝑜 b) 𝐼 = 2𝐼𝑜
c) 𝐼 = 4𝐼𝑜 d) There is no relation between 𝐼 and 𝐼𝑜
208. Which one of the following phenomena is not explained by Huygen’s construction of wavefront
a) Refraction b) Reflection c) Diffraction d) Origin of spectra
209. The wave theory of light was given by
a) Maxwell b) Planck c) Huygen d) Young
210. In a Young’s double slit experiment, the central point on the screen is
a) Bright b) Dark
c) First bright and then dark d) First dark and then bright
211. The speed of electromagnetic wave in vacuum depends upon the source of radiation
a) Increases as we move from 𝛾-rays to radio waves b) Decreases as we move from 𝛾-rays to radio waves
c) Is same for all of them d) None of these
212. Which of the following is conserved when light waves interfere
a) Intensity b) Energy c) Amplitude d) Momentum
213. In Young’s double slit experiment, the slit width and the distance of slits from the screen both are doubled.
The fringe width
a) Increases b) Decreases c) Remains unchanged d) None of these
214. In Young’s double slit experiment, when violet light of wavelength 4358 Å is used, the 84 fringe are seen in
the field of view, but when sodium light of certain wavelength is used, then 62 fringes are seen in the field
of view, the wavelength of sodium light is
a) 6893 Å b) 5904 Å c) 5523 Å d) 6429 Å
215. Select the right option in the following
a) Christian Huygens, a contemporary of Newton established the wave theory of light by assuming that
light waves were transverse
b) Maxwell provided the theoretical evidence that light is transverse wave
c) Thomas Young experimentally proved the wave behavior of light and Huygens assumption
d) All the statements given above, correctly answers the question “what is light?”
216. In Young’s double slit experiment with sodium vapour lamp of wavelength 589 nm and the slits 0.589 mm
apart, the half angular width of the central maximum is
a) sin−1 0.01 b) sin−1 0.0001 c) sin−1 0.001 d) sin−1 0.1
217. Which phenomenon best supports the theory that matter has a wave nature?
a) Electron momentum b) Electron diffraction c) Photon momentum d) Photon diffraction
218. To observe diffraction the size of an obstacle
a) Should be of the same order as wavelength b) Should be much larger than the wavelength
c) Have no relation to wavelength d) Should be exactly 𝜆/2
219. When unpolarised light beam is incident from air onto glass (𝑛 = 1.5) at the polarizing angle
a) Reflected beam is polarized 100 percent
b) Reflected and refracted beams are partially polarized
c) The reason for (a) is that almost all the light is reflected
d) All of the above
220. In Young’s double slit interference experiment, the slit separation is made 3 fold. The fringe width
becomes
a) 1/3 𝑡𝑖𝑚𝑒𝑠 b) 1/9 𝑡𝑖𝑚𝑒𝑠 c) 3 𝑡𝑖𝑚𝑒𝑠 d) 9 𝑡𝑖𝑚𝑒𝑠
221. when monochromatic light is replaced by white light in Fresnel’s biprism arrangement, the central fringe
is
a) Coloured b) White c) Dark d) None of these
222. A rocket is going towards moon with a speed 𝑣. The astronaut in the rocket sends signals of frequency 𝑣
towards the moon and receives them back on reflection from the moon. What will be the frequency of the
signal received by the astronaut (Take 𝑣 ≪ 𝑐)
𝑐 𝑐 2𝑣 2𝑐
a) 𝑣 b) 𝑣 c) 𝑣 d) 𝑣
𝑐−𝑣 𝑐 − 2𝑣 𝑐 𝑣
223. The transverse nature of light is shown by
a) Interference of light b) Refraction of light c) Polarisation of light d) Dispersion of light
224. Soap bubble appears coloured due to the phenomenon of
a) Interference b) Diffraction c) Dispersion d) Reflection
225. H-polaroid is prepared by
a) Orienting herapathite crystal in the same direction in nitrocellulose
b) Using thin tourmaline crystals
c) Stretching polyvinyl alcohol and then heated with dehydration agent
d) Stretching polyvinyl alcohol and then impregnation with iodine
226. In Young’s double slit experiment with monochromatic light of wavelength 600 mm, the distance between
slits is 10−3 m. For changing fringe width by 3 × 10−5 m
a) The screen is moved away from the slits by 5 cm
b) The screen is moved by 5 cm towards the slits
c) The screen is moved by 3 cm towards the slits
d) Both (a) and (b) are correct
227. For constructive interference to take place between two monochromatic light waves of wavelength 𝜆, the
path difference should be
𝜆 𝜆 𝜆
a) (2𝑛 − 1) b) (2𝑛 − 1) c) 𝑛𝜆 d) (2𝑛 + 1)
4 2 2
228. Two coherent sources separated by distance 𝑑 are radiating in phase having wavelength 𝜆. A detector
moves in a big circle around the two sources in the plane of the two sources. The angular position of 𝑛 = 4
interference maxima is given as

S1 S2

𝑛𝜆 4𝜆 𝑑 𝜆
a) sin−1 b) cos −1 c) tan−1 d) cos −1
𝑑 𝑑 4𝜆 4𝑑
229. Young’s experiment establishes that
a) Light consists of waves b) Light consists of particles
c) Light consists of neither particles nor waves d) Light consists of both particles and waves
230. In Young’s double slit interference pattern the fringe width
a) Can be changed only by changing the wavelength of incident light
b) Can be changed only by changing the separation between the two slits
c) Can be changed either by changing the wavelength or by changing the separation between two sources
d) Is a universal constant and hence cannot be changed
231. If fringe width is 0.4 mm, the distance between fifth bright and third and third dark band on same side is
a) 1 mm b) 2 mm c) 3 mm d) 4 mm
232. Which of the following electromagnetic waves have minimum frequency
a) Microwaves b) Audible waves c) Ultrasonic waves d) Radiowaves
233. In the propagation of light waves, the angle between the direction of vibration and plane of polarization is
a) 0° b) 90° c) 45° d) 80°
234. A zone plate of focal length 60𝑐𝑚, behaves as a convex lens, If wavelength of incident light is 6000 Å, then
radius of first half period zone will be
a) 36 × 10−8 𝑚 b) 6 × 10−8 𝑚 c) √6 × 10−8 𝑚 d) 6 × 10−4 𝑚
235. Consider Fraunhofer diffraction pattern obtained with a single slit at normal incidence. At the angular
position of first diffraction minimum, the phase difference between the wavelets from the opposite edges
of the slit is
𝜋 𝜋
a) b) c) 𝜋 d) 2𝜋
4 2
236. In Fresnel diffraction, if the distance between the disc and the screen is decreased, the intensity of central
bright spot will
a) Increase b) Decrease c) Remain constant d) None of these
237. A star is going away from the earth. An observer on the earth will see the wavelength of light coming from
the star
a) Decreased
b) Increased
c) Neither decreased nor increased
d) Decreased or increased depending upon the velocity of the star
238. All components of the electromagnetic spectrum in vacuum have the same
a) Energy b) Velocity c) Wavelength d) Frequency
239. In a biprism experiment, by using light of wavelength 5000 Å, 5𝑚𝑚 wide fringes are obtained on a screen
1.0 𝑚 away from the coherent sources. The separation between the two coherent sources is
a) 1.0 𝑚𝑚 b) 0.1 𝑚𝑚 c) 0.05 𝑚𝑚 d) 0.01 𝑚𝑚
240. The time period of rotation of the sun is 25 days and its radius is 7 × 108 𝑚. The Doppler shift for the light
of wavelength 6000 Å emitted from the surface of the sun will be
a) 0.04 Å b) 0.40 Å c) 4.00 Å d) 40.0 Å
241. In young’s two slit experiment the distance between the two coherent sources is 2 mm and the screen is at
a distance of 1 m. If the fringe width is found to be 0.03 cm, then the wavelength of the light used is
a) 4000Å b) 5000Å c) 5890Å d) 6000Å
242. Two identical light waves, propagating in the same direction, have a phase difference 𝛿. After they
superpose, the intensity of the resulting wave will be proportional to
a) cos 𝛿 b) cos(𝛿/2) c) cos2 (𝛿/2) d) cos2 𝛿
243. Light from two coherent sources of the same amplitude A and wavelength 𝜆 illuminates the screen. The
intensity of the central maximum is 𝐼0 . If the sources were incoherent, the intensity at the same point will
be
𝐼
a) 4𝐼0 b) 2𝐼0 c) 𝐼0 d) 0
2
244. The wavelength of light observed on the earth, from a moving star is found to decrease by 0.05%. Relative
to the earth the star is
a) Moving away with a velocity of 1.5 × 105 𝑚/𝑠
b) Coming closer with a velocity of 1.5 × 105 𝑚/𝑠
c) Moving away with a velocity of 1.5 × 104 𝑚/𝑠
d) Coming closer with a velocity of 1.5 × 104 𝑚/𝑠
245. A grating which would be most suitable for constructing a spectrometer for the visibleand ultraviolet
region, should have

a) 100 lines/cm b) 1000 lines/cm c) 10000 lines/cm d) 100000 lines/cm

246. In the Young’s double slit experiment, for which colour the fringe width is least
a) Red b) Green c) Blue d) Yellow
247. Two identical radiators have a separation of 𝑑 = 𝜆/4 where 𝜆 is the wavelength of the waves emitted by
either source. The initial phase difference between the sources is 𝜋/4. Then the intensity on the screen at a
distant point situated at an angle 𝜃 = 30° from the radiators is (here 𝐼𝑜 is intensity at that point due to one
radiator alone)
a) 𝐼𝑜 b) 2𝐼𝑜 c) 3𝐼𝑜 d) 4𝐼𝑜
248. The electric field of a plane electromagnetic wave varies with time of amplitude 2𝑉𝑚 −1 propagating along
𝑧-axis. The average energy density of the magnetic field is (in 𝐽𝑚 −3)
a) 13.29 × 10−12 b) 8.86 × 10−12 c) 17.72 × 10−12 d) 4.43 × 10−12
249. Red light of wavelength 625 𝑛𝑚 is incident normally on an optical diffraction grating with 2 × 105 lines/𝑚.
Including central principal maxima, how many maxima may be observed on a screen which is far from the
 grating
a) 15 b) 17 c) 8 d) 16
250. Microwaves from a transmitter are directed normally towards a plane reflector. A detector moves along
the normal to the reflector. Between positions of 14 successive maxima, the detector travels a distance of
0.14 m. The frequency of transmitter is
a) 1.5 × 1010 H b) 1010 H c) 3 × 1010 H d) 6 × 1010 H
251. The width of the diffraction band varies
a) Inversely as the wavelength
b) Directly as the width of the slit
c) Directly as the distance between the slit and the screen
d) Inversely as the size of the source from which the slit is illuminated
252. A ray of light is incident at polarising angle such that its deviation is 24°, then angle of incidence is
a) 24° b) 57° c) 66° d) 90°
253. If the polarizing angle of a piece of glass for green light is 54.74°, then the angle of minimum deviation for
an equilateral prism made of same glass is
[Given ∶ tan 54.74° = 1.414]
a) 45° b) 54.74° c) 60° d) 30°
254. In a Young’s double-slit experiment, constructive interference is produced at a certain point P. The
intensities of light at P due to the individual sources are 4 and 9 units. The resultant intensity at point P
will be
a) 13 units b) 25 units c) √97 units d) 5 units
255. Illumination of the sun at noon is maximum because
a) Scattering is reduced at noon b) Refraction of light is minimum at noon
c) Rays are incident almost normally d) The sun is nearer to earth at noon
256. The ratio of intensities of two waves is 9:1. They are producing interference. The ratio of maximum and
minimum intensities will be
a) 10 : 8 b) 9 : 1 c) 4 : 1 d) 2 : 1
257. Two sources of waves are called coherent if
a) Both have the same amplitude of vibrations
b) Both produce waves of the same wavelength
c) Both produce waves of the same wavelength having constant phase difference
d) Both produce waves having the same velocity
258. If white light is used in a biprism experiment then
a) Fringe pattern will be disappears
b) All fringe will be coloured
c) Central fringe will be white while others will be coloured
d) Central fringe will be dark
259. A circular disc is placed in front of a narrow source. When the point of observation is 2 𝑚 from the disc,
then it covers first HPZ. The intensity at this point is 𝐼. When the point of observation is 25 𝑐𝑚 from the
disc then intensity will be
𝑅 2 𝑅 2 𝑅 2 𝑅 2
a) ( 6 ) 𝐼 b) ( 7 ) 𝐼 c) ( 8 ) 𝐼 d) ( 9 ) 𝐼
𝑅2 𝑅2 𝑅2 𝑅2
260. Fringes are obtained with the help of a biprism in the focal plane of an eyepiece distance 1 m from the slit.
A convex lens produces images of the slit in two positions between biprism and eyepiece. The distances
between two images of the slit in two positions are4.05 × 10−3 m and 2.90 × 10−3 m respectively. The
distance between the slits will be
a) 3.43 × 10−3 m b) 0.343m c) 0.0343m d) 43.3m
261. What should be refractive index of a transparent medium to be invisible in vacuum?
a) 1 b) <1 c) >1 d) None of these
262. When light is incident on a doubly refracting crystal, two refracted rays-ordinary ray (𝑂-ray) and extra
 ordinary ray (𝐸-ray) are produced. Then
a) Both 𝑂-ray and 𝐸-ray are polarized perpendicular to the plane of incidence
b) Both 𝑂-ray and 𝐸-ray are polarized in the plane of incidence
c) 𝐸-ray is polarised perpendicular to the plane of incidence and 𝑂-ray in the plane of incidence
d) 𝐸-ray is polarized in the plane of incidence and 𝑂-ray perpendicular to the plane of incidence
263. The range of wavelength of the visible light is
a) 10 Åto 100 Å b) 4,000 Å to 8,000 Å c) 8,000 Å to 10,000 Å d) 10,000 Å to 15,000 Å
264. Huygen’s principle of secondary wavelets may be used to
a) Find the velocity of light in vacuum b) Explain the particle behavior of light
c) Find the new position of the wavefront d) Explain photoelectric effect
265. If a source is transmitting electromagnetic wave of frequency 8.2 × 106 𝐻𝑧, then wavelength of the
electromagnetic waves transmitted from the source will be
a) 36.6 𝑚 b) 40.5 𝑚 c) 42.3 𝑚 d) 50.9 𝑚
266. Two beams of light will not give rise to an interference pattern, if
a) They are coherent
b) They have the same wavelength
c) They are linearly polarized perpendicular to each other
d) They are not monochromatic
267. In Young’s double-slit experiment the fringe width is 𝛽. If entire arrangement is placed in a liquid of
refractive index 𝑛, the fringe width becomes
𝛽 𝛽 𝛽
a) b) 𝑛𝛽 c) d)
𝑛+1 𝑛 𝑛−1
268. In a Young’s double slit experiment the intensity at a point where the path difference is 𝜆 (𝜆 being the
6
𝐼
wavelength of the light used) is 𝐼. If 𝐼0 denotes the maximum intensity, 𝐼 is equal to
0
1 √3 c) 1/2 d) 3/4
a) b)
√2 2
269. In an experiment of Newton’s rings, the diameter of the 20th dark ring was found to be 5.82 𝑚𝑚 and that of
the 10th ring 3.36 𝑚𝑚. If the radius of the plano-convex lens is 1 𝑚, the wavelength of light used is
a) 5646 Å b) 5896 Å c) 5406 Å d) 5900 Å
270. Red light is generally used to observe diffraction pattern from single slit. If blue light is used instead of red
light, then diffraction pattern
a) Will be more clear b) Will contract c) Will expanded d) Will not be visualized
271. In Young’s double slit experiment, if 𝐿 is the distance between the slits and the screen upon which
interference pattern is observed, 𝑥 is the average distance between the adjacent fringes and 𝑑 being the
slit separation. The wavelength of light is given by
𝑥𝑑 𝑥𝐿 𝐿𝑑 1
a) b) c) d)
𝐿 𝑑 𝑥 𝐿𝑑𝑥
272. The critical angle of a certain medium is sin−1 (3) . The polarizing angle of the medium is
5
4 3 5 4
a) tan−1 ( ) b) tan−1 ( ) c) tan−1 ( ) d) sin−1 ( )
3 4 3 5
273. In Young’s double slit experiment, distance between two slits is 0.28 mm and distance between slits and
screen is 1.4 m. Distance between central bright fringe and third bright fringe is 0.9 cm, what is the
wavelength of light used?
a) 4000 Å b) 6000 Å c) 3000 Å d) 5000 Å
274. What is the minimum thickness of a thin film required for constructive interference in the reflected light
from it?
Given, the refractive index of the film = 1.5
Wavelength of the light incident on the film = 60𝑛𝑚
a) 100 𝑛𝑚 b) 300 𝑛𝑚 c) 50 𝑛𝑚 d) 200 𝑛𝑚
275. The Young’s double slit experiment is performed with blue and with green light of wavelengths 4360 Å
and 5460 Å respectively. If 𝑥 is the distance of 4th maximum from the central one, then
𝑥 (blue) 5460
a) 𝑥 (blue) = 𝑥 (green) b) 𝑥 (blue) > 𝑥 (green) c) 𝑥 (blue) < 𝑥 (green) d) .
𝑥 (green) 4360
276. Red light of wavelength 625 nm is incident normally on an optical diffraction grating with 2 × 105
lines/m. Including central principal maxima, how many maxima may be observed on a screen which is for
from the grating?
a) 15 b) 17 c) 8 d) 16
277. The ratio of the intensity at the centre of a bright fringe to the intensity at a point one-quarter of the
distance between two fringe from the centre is
a) 2 b) 1/2 c) 4 d) 16
278. In Young’s double slit experiment, the width of one of the slits is slowly increased to make it twice the
width of the other slit. Then in the interference pattern
a) The intensities of maxima increase while that of minima decrease
b) The intensities of both maxima and minima decrease
c) The intensities of both maxima and minima remain the same
d) The intensities of both maxima and minima increase
279. The distance between the first and the sixth minima in the diffraction pattern of a single alit is 0.5 mm. The
screen is 0.5 m away from the slit. If the wavelength of light used is 5000 Å, then the slit width will be
a) 5 mm b) 2.5 mm c) 1.25 mm d) 1.0 mm
280. The separation between successive fringes in a double slit arrangement is𝑥. If the whole arrangement is
dipped under water, what will be the new fringe separation?
[The wavelength of light being used in 5000 Å]
a) 1.5 𝑥 b) 𝑥 c) 0.75 𝑥 d) 2 𝑥
281. Infrared radiation was discovered in 1800 by
a) William Wollaston b) William Herschel c) Wilhelm Roentgen d) Thomas Young
282. The electric field of an electromagnetic wave in free space is given by 𝐸⃗ = 10 cos(107 𝑡 + 𝑘𝑥)𝑗̂ 𝑉/𝑚, where
𝑡 and 𝑥 are in seconds and metres respectively. It can be inferred that
(1) The wavelength 𝜆 is 188.4 𝑚
(2) The wave number 𝑘 is 0.33 rad/𝑚
(3) The wave amplitude is 10 V/m
(4) The wave is propagating along +𝑥 direction
Which one of the following pairs of statements is correct
a) (3) and (4) b) (1) and (2) c) (2) and (3) d) (1) and (3)
283. Two slits, 4 mm apart are illuminated by light of wavelength600 Å. What will be the fringe width on a
screen placed 2 m from the slits?
a) 0.12 mm b) 0.3 mm c) 3.0 mm d) 4.0 mm
284. 𝑛th Bright fringe if red light (𝜆1 = 7500 Å) coincides with (𝑛 + 1) bright fringe of green light(𝜆2 =
𝑡ℎ

6000 Å). The value of 𝑛 =?

a) 4 b) 5 c) 3 d) 2
285. The fringe width a distance of 50 cm from the slits in Young’s experiment for light of wavelength 6000 Å is
0.048 cm. The fringe width at the same distance for 𝜆 = 5000 Å will be
a) 0.04 cm b) 0.4 cm c) 0.14 cm d) 0.45 cm
286. In an interference experiment, phase difference for points where the intensity is minimum is (𝑛 =
1, 2, 3, … . )
a) 𝑛𝜋 b) (𝑛 + 1)𝜋 c) (2𝑛 − 1)𝜋 d) Zero
287. The ratio of intensities of successive maxima in the diffraction pattern due to the single slit is
a) 1:4:9 b) 1:2:3 4 4 4 9
c) 1: 2 : 2
d) 1: 2 : 2
9𝜋 25𝜋 𝜋 𝜋
288. The Young’ experiment is performed with the lights of blue (𝜆 = 4360 Å) and green colour (𝜆 = 5460Å), if
 the distance of the 4th fringe from the centre is 𝑥, then
𝑥 (𝐵𝑙𝑢𝑒) 5460
a) 𝑥 (Blue) = 𝑥 (Green) b) 𝑥 (Blue) > 𝑥 (Green) c) 𝑥 (Blue) < 𝑥 (Green) d) =
𝑥 (𝐺𝑟𝑒𝑒𝑛) 4360
289. The periodic time of rotation of a certain star is 22 days and its radius is 7 × 10 𝑚𝑒𝑡𝑟𝑒𝑠. If the wavelength
8

of light emitted by its surface be 4320 Å, the Doppler shift will be (1 day = 86400 𝑠𝑒𝑐)
a) 0.033 Å b) 0.33 Å c) 3.3 Å d) 33 Å
290. As a result of interference of two coherent sources of light, energy is
a) Increased
b) Redistributed and the distribution does not vary with time
c) Decreased
d) Redistributed and the distribution changes with time
291. The maximum number of possible interference maxima for slit-separation equal to twice the wavelength
in Young’s double-slit experiment is
a) Infinite b) Five c) Three d) Zero
292. Two coherent sources of different intensities send waves which interfere. The ratio of maximum intensity
to the minimum intensity is 25. The intensities of the sources are in the ratio
a) 25 : 1 b) 5 : 1 c) 9 : 4 d) 25 : 16
293. The main difference between the phenomena of interference and diffraction is that
a) Diffraction is caused by reflected waves from a source whereas interference is caused due to refraction
of waves from a source
b) Diffraction is due to interaction of waves derived from the same source, whereas interference is that
bending of light from the same wavefront
c) Diffraction is due to interaction of light from wavefront, whereas the interference is the interaction of
two waves derived from the same source
d) Diffraction is due to interaction of light from the same wavefront whereas interference is the
interaction of waves from two isolated sources
294. A parallel plate capacitor of plate separation 2 𝑚𝑚 is connected in an electric circuit having source voltage
400 𝑉. If the plate area 60𝑐𝑚 2, then the value of displacement current for 10−6 𝑠 will be
a) 1.062 𝑎𝑚𝑝 b) 1.062 × 10−2 𝑎𝑚𝑝 c) 1.062 × 10−3 𝑎𝑚𝑝 d) 1.062 × 10−4 𝑎𝑚𝑝
295. In single slit diffraction pattern
a) Central fringe has negligible width than others
b) All fringes are of same width
c) Central fringes do not exist
d) None of the above
296. Two beams of light having intensities 𝐼 and4𝐼 interfere to produce a fringe pattern on a screen. The phase
difference between the beams is 𝜋/2 at point A and𝜋at point 𝐵.Then the difference between the resultant
intensities at 𝐴and𝐵is
a) 2𝐼 b) 4𝐼 c) 5𝐼 d) 7𝐼
297. In Young’s double slit interference pattern the fringe width
a) Can be changed only by changing the wavelength of incident light
b) Can be changed only by changing the separation between the two slits
c) Can be changed either by changing the wavelength or by changing the separation between the two slits
d) Is a universal constant, hence cannot be changed
298. In double slit experiment, the distance between two slits is 0.6 mm and these are illuminated with light of
wavelength 4800 Å. The angular width of first dark fringe on the screen distant 120 cm from slits will be
a) 8 × 10−4 rad b) 6 × 10−4 rad c) 4 × 10−4 rad d) 16 × 10−4 rad
299. The similarity between the sound waves and light waves is
a) Both are electromagnetic waves b) Both are longitudinal waves
c) Both have the same speed in a medium d) They can produce interference
300. A star moves away from earth at speed 0.8 𝑐 while emitting light of frequency 6 × 1014 𝐻𝑧.What frequency
 will be observed on the earth (in units of 1014 𝐻𝑧) (𝑐 = speed of light)
a) 0.24 b) 1.2 c) 30 d) 3.3
301. In Young’s double slit experiment if the slits widths are in the ratio 1 : 9, the ratio of the intensities at
minima to that at maxima will be
a) 1 b) 1/9 c) 1/4 d) 1/3
302. Four independent waves are represented by equations
VIII. 𝑋1 = 𝑎1 sin 𝜔𝑡
IX. 𝑋2 = 𝑎1 sin 2 𝜔𝑡
X. 𝑋3 = 𝑎1 sin 𝜔1 𝑡
XI. 𝑋4 = 𝑎1 sin(𝜔𝑡 + 𝛿)
Interference is possible between waves represented by equation
a) 3 and 4 b) 1 and 2 c) 2 and 3 d) 1 and 4
303. The ratio of intensities of consecutive maxima in the diffraction pattern due to a single slit is
a) 1 : 4 : 9 b) 1 : 2 : 3 4 4 1 9
c) 1: 2 : 2
d) 1: 2 : 2
9𝜋 25𝜋 𝜋 𝜋
304. The velocity of light emitted by a source 𝑆 observed by an observer 𝑂, who is at rest with respect to 𝑆 is 𝑐.
If the observer moves towards 𝑆 with velocity 𝑣, the velocity of light as observed will be
𝑣2
a) 𝑐 + 𝑣 b) 𝑐 − 𝑣 c) 𝑐 d) √1 −
𝑐2
305. A 20 𝑐𝑚 length of a certain solution causes right handed rotation of 38°. A 30 𝑐𝑚 length of another
solution causes left handed rotation of 24°. The optical rotation caused by 30 𝑐𝑚 length of a mixture of the
above solutions in the volume ratio 1 : 2 is
a) Left handed rotation of 14° b) Right handed rotation of 14°
c) Left handed rotation of 3° d) Right handed rotation of 3°
306. A stone thrown into still water, creates a circular wave pattern moving radially outwards. If 𝑟 is the
distance measured from the centre of the pattern, the amplitude of the wave varies as
a) 𝑟 −1/2 b) 𝑟 −1 c) 𝑟 −2 d) 𝑟 −3/2
307. A signal emitted by an antenna from a certain point can be received at another point of the surface in the
form of
a) Sky wave b) Ground wave c) Sea wave d) Both (a) and (b)
308. Angular width (𝛽) of central maximum of a diffraction pattern on a single slit does not depend upon
a) Distance between slit and source b) Wavelength of light used
c) Width of the slit d) Frequency of light slit
309. Maxwell in his famous equation of electromagnetism introduced the concept of
a) a.c. current b) d.c. current c) Displacement current d) Impedance
310. A beam of natural light falls on a system of 6 polaroids, which are arranged in succession such that each
polaroid is turned through 30° with respct to the preceding one. The percentage of incident intensity that
passes through the system will be
a) 100% b) 50% c) 30% d) 12%
311. The equations of two interfering waves are 𝑦1 = 𝑏 cos 𝜔𝑡 and𝑦2 = 𝑏 cos(𝜔𝑡 + ϕ). For destructive
interference the path difference is
a) 0° b) 360° c) 180° d) 720°
312. Light of wavelength 589.3𝑛𝑚 is incident normally on the slit of width 0.1𝑛𝑚. What will be the angular
width of the central diffraction maximum at a distance of 1𝑚 from the slit
a) 0.68° b) 1.02° c) 0.34° d) None of these
313. Which one of the following is the property of a monochromatic, plane electromagnetic wave in free space
a) Electric and magnetic fields have a phase difference of 𝜋/2
b) The energy contribution of both electric and magnetic fields are equal
c) The direction of propagation is in the direction of 𝐵
⃗ × 𝐸⃗
d) The pressure exerted by the wave is the product of its speed and energy density
314. In Young’s double slit experiment, distance between two sources is 0.1 𝑚𝑚. The distance of screen from
the sources is 20 𝑐𝑚. Wavelength of light used is 5460 Å. Then angular position of the first dark fringe is
a) 0.08° b) 0.18° c) 0.20° d) 0.313°
315. In Young’s double slit experiment, the fringe width is 1 × 10 𝑚. If the distance between the slit and
−4

screen is doubled and the distance between the two slit is reduced to half and wavelength is changed from
6.4 × 10−7 𝑚 to 4.0 × 10−7 𝑚, the value of new fringe width will be
a) 0.15 × 10−4 𝑚 b) 2.0 × 10−4 𝑚 c) 1.25 × 10−4 𝑚 d) 2.5 × 10−4 𝑚
316. If 𝐸⃗ and 𝐵
⃗ are the electric and magnetic field vectors of E.M. waves then the direction of propagation of
E.M. wave is along the direction of
a) 𝐸⃗ b) 𝐵⃗ c) 𝐸⃗ × 𝐵⃗ d) None of these
317. A heavenly body is receding from earth such that the fractional change in𝜆 is 1, then its velocity is
3𝑐 𝑐 2𝑐
a) 𝑐 b) c) d)
5 5 5
318. In Young’s double slit experiment, a third slit is made in between the double slits. Then
a) Intensity of fringes totally disappears
b) Only bright light is observed on the screen
c) Fringes of unequal width are formed
d) Contrast between bright and dark fringes is reduced
319. 80 g of impure sugar when dissolved in a litre of water given an optical rotation of9.9°, when placed in a
tube of length 20 cm. If the specific rotation of sugar is 66°, then concentration of sugar solution will be
a) 80 𝑔𝐿−1 b) 75 𝑔𝐿−1 c) 65 𝑔𝐿−1 d) 50 𝑔𝐿−1
320. If 𝐼0 is the intensity of the principal maximum in the single slit diffraction pattern, then what will be its
intensity when the slit which is doubled
𝐼0
a) 𝐼0 b) c) 2𝐼0 d) 4𝐼0
2
321. In Young’s double alit experiment, the seventh maximum with wavelength 𝜆1 is at a distance 𝑑1 and the
same maximum with wavelength 𝜆2 is at distance𝑑2 . Then 𝑑1 /𝑑2 =
𝜆1 𝜆2 𝜆12 𝜆22
a) b) c) 2 d) 2
𝜆2 𝜆1 𝜆2 𝜆1
322. In an electromagnetic wave, the electric and magnetizing fields are 100 𝑉𝑚 −1and 0.265 𝐴𝑚 −1 . The
maximum energy flow is
a) 26.5 𝑊/𝑚 2 b) 36.5 𝑊/𝑚 2 c) 46.7 𝑊/𝑚 2 d) None of these
323. Two waves of same frequency and same amplitude from two monochromatic source are allowed to
superpose at a certain point. If in once case the phase difference is 0° and in other case is 𝜋/2, the ratio of
the intensities in the two cases will be
a) 1:1 b) 2:1 c) 4:1 d) None of these
324. Out of the following statements which is not correct
a) When unpolarised light passes through a Nicol prism, the emergent light is elliptically polarised
b) Nicol prism works on the principle of double refraction and total internal reflection
c) Nicol prism can be used to produce and analyse polarized light
d) Calcite and Quartz are both doubly refracting crystals
325. A laser beam can be focused on an area equal to the square of its wavelength, 𝐴 𝐻𝑒-𝑁𝑒 laser radiates
energy at the rate of 1𝑚𝑉 and its wavelength is 632.8 𝑛𝑚. The intensity of focussed beam will be
a) 1.5 × 1013 𝑊/𝑚 2 b) 2.5 × 109 𝑊/𝑚2 c) 3.5 × 1017 𝑊/𝑚 2 d) None of these
326. The oscillating electric and magnetic vectors of an electromagnetic wave are oriented along
a) The same direction but differ in phase by 90°
b) The same direction and are in phase
c) Mutually perpendicular directions and are in phase
d) Mutually perpendicular directions and differ in phase by 90°
327. Which of the following phenomena can explain quantum nature of light
 a) Photoelectric effect b) Interference c) Diffraction d) Polarization
328. In an interference pattern produced by two identical slits, the intensity at the slit of the central maximum
is 𝐼. The intensity at the same spot when either if the slits is closed is𝐼0 . Therefore
a) 𝐼 = 𝐼0
b) 𝐼 = 2𝐼0
c) 𝐼 = 4𝐼0
d) 𝐼 and𝐼0 are not related to each other
329. Radius of central zone of circular zone plate is 2.3𝑚𝑚. Wavelength of incident light is 5893 Å. Source is at
a distance of 6𝑚. Then the distance of first image will be
a) 9𝑚 b) 12𝑚 c) 24𝑚 d) 36𝑚
330. Three observers 𝐴, 𝐵 and 𝐶 measure the speed of light coming from a source to be 𝑣𝐴 , 𝑣𝐵 and 𝑣𝐶 . The
observer 𝐴 moves towards the source, the observer 𝐶 moves away from the source with the same speed.
The observer 𝐵 stays stationary, the surrounding space is vacuum every where. Then
a) 𝑣𝐴 > 𝑣𝐵 > 𝑣𝐶 b) 𝑣𝐴 < 𝑣𝐵 < 𝑣𝐶 c) 𝑣𝐴 = 𝑣𝐵 = 𝑣𝐶 d) 𝑣𝐴 = 𝑣𝐵 > 𝑣𝐶
331. On introducing a thin film in the path of one of the two interfering beams, the central fringe will shift by
one fringe width. If 𝜇 − 1.5, the thickness of the film is (wavelength of monochromatic light is 𝜆)
a) 4𝜆 b) 3𝜆 c) 2𝜆 d) 𝜆
332. Two waves originating from source 𝑆1 and𝑆2 having zero phase difference and common wavelength 𝜆 will
show complete destructive interference at a point P, is (𝑆1 𝑃 − 𝑆2 𝑃 ) =
3𝜆 4𝜆 11𝜆
a) 5𝜆 b) c) d)
4 2 2
333. In a Young’s double slit experiment, the slit separation is 0.2𝑐𝑚, the distance between the screen and slit is
1𝑚. Wavelength of the light used is 5000 Å. The distance between two consecutive dark fringes (in 𝑚𝑚) is
a) 0.25 b) 0.26 c) 0.27 d) 0.28
334. By a monochromatic wave, we mean
a) A single ray b) A single ray of a single colour
c) Wave having a single wavelength d) Many rays of a single colour
335. A beam of natural light falls on a system of 5 polaroids, which are arranged in succession such that the
pass axis of each polaroid is turned through 60° with respect to the preceding one. The fraction of the
incident light intensity that passes through the system is
1 1 1 1
a) b) c) d)
64 32 256 512
336. In which one of the following regions of the electromagnetic spectrum will the vibrational motion of
molecules give rise to absorption
a) Ultraviolet b) Microwaves c) Infrared d) Radio waves
337. If fringes width 𝜆 = 5.89 × 10−5 cm is 0.431 mm and shift of white central fringe on introducing a mica
sheet in one path is 1.89 mm. Thickness of the mica sheet will be (𝜇 = 1.59)
a) 438 × 10−6 m b) 538 × 10−6 m c) 638 × 10−6 m d) None of these
338. A plane electromagnetic wave travels in free space along 𝑥-axis. At a particular point in space, the electric
field along 𝑦-axis is 9.3 𝑉𝑚 −1 . The magnetic induction (𝐵) along 𝑧-axis is
a) 3.1 × 10−8 𝑇 b) 3 × 10−5 𝑇 c) 3 × 10−6 𝑇 d) 9.3 × 10−6 𝑇
339. Colours of thin films result from
Or
On a rainy day, a small oil film on water show brilliant colours. This is due to
a) Dispersion of light b) Interference of light c) Absorption of light d) Scattering of light
340. An astronaut floating freely in space decides to use his flash light as a rocket. He shines a 10 𝑤𝑎𝑡𝑡 light
beam in a fixed direction so that he acquires momentum in the opposite direction. If his mass is 80 𝑘𝑔,
how long must he need to reach a velocity of 1 𝑚𝑠 −1
a) 9 𝑠 b) 2.4 × 103 𝑠 c) 2.4 × 106 𝑠 d) 2.4 × 109 𝑠
341. Newton postulated his corpuscular theory on the basis of
a) Newton’s rings b) Colours of thin films
 c) Rectilinear propagation of light d) Dispersion of white light
342. The idea of secondary wavelets for the propagation of a wave was first given by
a) Newton b) Huygen c) Maxwell d) Fresnel
343. Refractive index of material is equal to tangent of polarizing angle. It is called
a) Brewster’s law b) Lambert’s law c) Malus’s law d) Bragg’s law
344. In Young’s double slit experiment, the aperture screen distance is 2𝑚. The fringe width is 1 𝑚𝑚. Light of
600 𝑛𝑚 is used. If a thin plate of glass (𝜇 = 1.5) of thickness 0.06 𝑚𝑚 is placed over one of the slits, then
there will be a lateral displacement of the fringes by
a) 0 𝑐𝑚 b) 5 𝑐𝑚 c) 10 𝑐𝑚 d) 15 𝑐𝑚
345. If a star is moving towards the earth, then the lines are shifted towards
a) Red b) Infrared c) Blue d) Green
346. Which rays are not the portion of electromagnetic spectrum
a) 𝑋-rays b) Microwaves c) 𝛼-rays d) Radio waves
347. Light is an electromagnetic wave. Its speed in vacuum is given by the expression
𝜇𝑜 𝜀𝑜 1
a) √𝜇𝑜 𝜀𝑜 b) √ c) √ d)
𝜀𝑜 𝜇𝑜 √𝜇𝑜 𝜀𝑜
348. If white light is used in Young’s double slit experiment
a) No interference pattern is formed
b) White fringes are formed
c) Central bright fringe is white
d) Central bright fringe is coloured
349. In the Young’s double slit experiment, if the phase difference between the two waves interfering at a point
is 𝜙, the intensity at that point can be expressed by the expression
𝐴 𝜙
a) 𝐼 = √𝐴2 + 𝐵2 cos2 𝜙 b) 𝐼 = cos 𝜙 c) 𝐼 = 𝐴 + 𝐵 cos d) 𝐼 = 𝐴 + 𝐵 cos 𝜙
𝐵 2
350. The condition for observing Fraunhoffer diffraction from a single slit is that the light wavefront incident
on the slit should be
a) Spherical b) Cylindrical c) Plane d) Elliptical
351. The region of the atmosphere above troposphere is known as
a) Lithosphere b) Uppersphere c) Ionosphere d) Stratosphere
352. Which of the following phenomenon exhibits particle’s nature of light?
a) Interference b) Diffraction c) Polarization d) Photoelectric effect
353. Due to Doppler’s effect, the shift in wavelength observed is 0.1Å for a star producing wavelength 6000Å.
Velocity of recession of the star will be
a) 2.5 𝑘𝑚/𝑠 b) 10 𝑘𝑚/𝑠 c) 5 𝑘𝑚/𝑠 d) 20 𝑘𝑚/𝑠
354. The figure shows four pairs of polarizing sheets, seen face-on. Each pair is mounted in the path of initially
unpolarised light. The polarizing direction of each sheet (indicated by the dashed line) is referenced to
either a horizontal 𝑥-axis or a vertical 𝑦 axis. Rank the pair according to the fraction of the initial intensity
that they pass, greatest first
30o 30o
30o
30o

60o 60o 60o

60o
(i) (ii) (iii) (iv)

a) (i) > (ii) > (iii) > (iv)

b) (i) > (iv) > (ii) > (iii)
c) (i) > (iii) > (ii) > (iv)
d) (iv) > (iii) > (ii) > (i)
355. In a double slit experiment, 5th dark fringe is formed opposite to one the slits. The wavelength of light is
𝑑2 𝑑2 𝑑2 𝑑2
a) b) c) d)
6𝐷 5𝐷 15𝐷 9𝐷
356. Pick out the correct statement in the propagation of electromagnetic waves for communication purposes
a) Space wave propagation is achieved by ionospheric reflection
b) Sky wave propagation is used for line-of-sight communication
c) Electromagnetic waves of frequencies higher than 30 𝑀𝐻𝑧 penetrate ionosphere
d) Satellite communication uses sky wave mode of propagation
357. In Young’s double slit experiment, phase difference between light waves reaching 3 rd bright fringe from
the central fringe when 𝜆 = 5000 Åis
a) 6 𝜋 b) 2 𝜋 c) 4 𝜋 d) zero
358. In a Young’s double slit experiment, the separation of the two slits is doubled. To keep the same spacing of
fringes, the distance 𝐷 of the screen from the slits should be made
𝐷 𝐷
a) b) c) 2𝐷 d) 4𝐷
2 √2
359. According to Newton’s corpuscular theory, the speed of light is
a) Same in all the media b) Lesser in rarer medium
c) Lesser in denser medium d) Independent of the medium
360. When an unpolarized light of intensity 𝐼0 is incident on a polarizing sheet, the intensity of the light which
does not get transmitted is
a) Zero 1 1
b) 𝐼0 c) 𝐼0 d) 𝐼0
2 4
361. A star emitting radiation at a wavelength of 5000Å is approaching earth with a velocity of 1.5 × 106 𝑚/𝑠.
The change in wavelength of the radiation as received on the earth, is
a) 25Å b) Zero c) 100Å d) 2.5Å
362. The rectilinear propagation of light in a medium is due to
a) Its short wavelength b) Its high frequency
c) Its high velocity d) The refractive index of medium
363. According to corpuscular theory of light, the different colours of light are due to
a) Different electromagnetic waves b) Different force of attraction among the corpuscles
c) Different size of the corpuscles d) None of the above
364. In case of linearly polarized light, the magnitude of the electric field vector
a) Does not change with time
b) Varies periodically with time
c) Increases and decreases linearly with time
d) Is parallel to the direction of propagation
365. The electric and the magnetic field, associated with an 𝑒.m. wave propagating along the +𝑧-axis, can be
represented by
⃗ = 𝐵0 𝑘̂ ]
a) [𝐸⃗ = 𝐸0 𝑗̂, 𝐵 b) [𝐸⃗ = 𝐸0 𝑗̂, 𝐵
⃗ = 𝐵0 𝑗̂] c) [𝐸⃗ = 𝐸0 𝑘̂, 𝐵
⃗ = 𝐵0 𝑖̂] d) [𝐸⃗ = 𝐸0 𝑗̂, 𝐵
⃗ = 𝐵0 𝑖̂]
366. The electromagnetic waves do not transport
a) Energy b) Charge c) Momentum d) Information
367. Following diffraction pattern was obtained using a diffraction grating using two different wavelengths 𝜆1
and 𝜆2 . With the help of the figure identify which is the longer wavelength and their ratios.
 a) 𝜆2 is longer than 𝜆1 and the ratio of the longer to the shorter wavelength is 1.5
b) 𝜆1 is longer than 𝜆2 and the ratio of the longer to the shorter wavelength is 1.5
c) 𝜆1 and 𝜆2 are equal and their ratio is 1.0
d) 𝜆2 is longer than 𝜆1 and the ratio of the longer to the shorter wavelength is 2.5
368. A ray of light is incident on the surface of a glass plate at an angle of incidence equal to Brewster’s angle 𝜙.
If 𝜇 represents the refractive index of glass with respect to air, then the angle between reflected and
refracted rays is
a) 90 + 𝜙 b) sin−1(𝜇 cos 𝜙)
c) 90° d) 90° − sin−1(sin−1 𝜙/𝜇)
369. In the set up shown in Fig the two slits, 𝑆1 and 𝑆2 are not equidistant from the slit 𝑆. The central fringe at 𝑂
is then

S1

S O

S2

a) Always bright b) Always dark

Either dark or bright depending on the position of d) Neither dark nor bright
c)
𝑆
370. If separation between screen and source is increased by 2%, what would be the effect on the intensity
a) Increases by 4% b) Increases by 2% c) Decreases by 2% d) Decreases by 4%
371. In a Young’s double slit experiment the intensity at a point where the path difference is 𝜆(λ being the
6
wavelength of the light used) is 𝐼. If 𝐼0 denotes the maximum intensity, 𝐼/𝐼0 is equal to
1 1 3
a) b) √3 c) d)
√2 2 2 4
372. In an apparatus, the electric field was found to oscillate with an amplitude of 18 𝑉/𝑚. The magnitude of
the oscillating magnetic field will be
a) 4 × 10−6 𝑇 b) 6 × 10−8 𝑇 c) 9 × 10−9 𝑇 d) 11 × 10−11 𝑇
373. Two non-coherent sources emit light beams of intensities 𝐼 and 4𝐼 . The maximum and minimum
intensities in the resulting beam are
a) 9I and I b) 9𝐼 and 3𝐼 c) 5𝐼 and 𝐼 d) 5𝐼 and 3𝐼
374. In a Young’s experiment, one of the slits is covered with a transparen’t sheet of thickness 3.6 × 10−3 cm
due to which position of central fringe shifts to a position originally occupied by 30th fringe. The refractive
index of the sheet, if 𝜆 = 6000 Å, is
a) 1.5 b) 1.2 c) 1.3 d) 1.7
375. In the far field diffraction pattern of a single slit under polychromatic illumination, the first minimum with
the wavelength 𝜆1 is found to be coincident with the third maximum at 𝜆2 . So
a) 3𝜆1 = 0.3𝜆2 b) 3𝜆1 = 𝜆2 c) 𝜆1 = 3.5𝜆2 d) 0.3𝜆1 = 3𝜆2
376. Two waves of equal amplitude and frequency interfere each other. The ratio of intensity when the two
waves arrive in phase to that when they arrive 90° out of phase is
a) 1 : 1 b) √2 ∶ 1 c) 2 : 1 d) 4 : 1
377. In Young’s experiment, the third bright band for light of wavelength 6000 Å coincides with the fourth
bright band for another source of light in the same arrangement. Then the wavelength of second source is
a) 3600 Å b) 4000 Å c) 5000 Å d) 4500 Å
378. Light appears to travel in straight lines since
a) It is not absorbed by the atmosphere b) It is reflected by the atmosphere
c) Its wavelength is very small d) Its velocity is very large
379. Air has refractive index 1.003, the thickness of air column, which will have one more wave length of yellow
light (6000 Å) than in the same thickness of vacuum is
 a) 2 mm b) 2 cm c) 2 m d) 2 km
380. The phenomenon of interference is shown by
a) Longitudinal mechanical waves only b) Transverse mechanical waves only
c) Electromagnetic waves only d) All the above types of waves
381. A beam of light 𝐴𝑂 is incident on a glass slab (𝜇 = 1.54) in a direction as shown in figure. The reflected ray
𝑂𝐵 is passed through a Nicol prism. On viewing through a Nicole prism, we find on rotating the prism that
A B
N

33° 33°
O

a) The intensity is reduced down to zero and remains zero

b) The intensity reduces down some what and rises again
c) There is no change in intensity
d) The intensity gradually reduces to zero and then again increases
382. In Young’s double slit experiment the amplitudes of two sources are 3𝑎 and 𝑎 respectively. The ratio of
intensities of bright and dark fringes will be
a) 3 : 1 b) 4 : 1 c) 2 : 1 d) 9 : 1
383. In a YDSE bi-chromatic light of wavelengths 400 nm and 560 nm are used. The distance between the slits
is 0.1 mm and the distance between the plane of the slits and the screen is 1 m. The minimum distance
between two successive regions of complete darkness is
a) 4 mm b) 5.6 mm c) 14 mm d) 28 mm
384. Which if the following phenomena is not common to sound and light waves?
a) Interference b) Diffraction c) Coherence d) Polarisation
385. An electromagnetic wave of frequency 𝑣 = 3.0 𝑀𝐻𝑧 passes from vacuum into a dielectric medium with
relative permitivity 𝜀𝑟 = 4.0. Then
a) Wavelength is doubled and the frequency remains unchanged
b) Wavelength is doubled and frequency becomes half
c) Wavelength is halved and frequency remains unchanged
d) Wavelength and frequency both remain unchanged
386. The wave theory of light, in its original form, was first postulated by
a) Issac Newton b) Christian Huygens
c) Thomas Young d) Augustin Jean Fresnel
387. A slit of width 𝑎 is illuminated by white light. For red light(𝜆 = 6500 Å), the first minima is obtained at 𝜃 =
30°. Then the value of 𝑎 will be
a) 3250 Å b) 6.5 × 10−4 𝑚𝑚 c) 1.24 𝑚𝑖𝑐𝑟𝑜𝑛𝑠 d) 2.6 × 10−4 𝑐𝑚
388. The angle of incidence of light is equal to Brewster’s angle, then
A. Reflected ray is perpendicular to refracted ray
B. Refracted ray is parallel to reflected ray
C. Reflected light is polarized having its electric vector in the plane of incidence
D. Refracted light is polarized
a) (A) and (D) are true b) (A) and (B) are true c) (A) and (C) are true d) (B) and (C) are true
389. The Fraunhofer diffraction pattern of a single slit is formed in the focal plane of a lens of focal length 1 m.
The width of slit is 0.3 mm. If third minimum is formed at a distance of 5 mm from central maximum, then
wavelength of light will be
a) 5000Å b) 2500Å c) 7500Å d) 8500Å
390. If two waves represented by 𝑦1 = 4 sin 𝜔𝑡 and 𝑦2 = 3 sin (𝜔𝑡 + ) interfere at a point, the amplitude of
𝜋
3
the resulting wave will be about
a) 7 b) 6 c) 5 d) 3.5
391. Light of wavelength 6000 Å is incident on a single slit. The first minimum of the diffraction pattern is
 obtained at 4 mm from the centre. The screen is at a distance of 2 m from the slit. The slit width will be
a) 0.3 mm b) 0.2 mm c) 0.15 mm d) 0.1 mm
392. Which statement is correct for a zone plate and a lens
a) Zone plate has multi focii whereas lens has one
b) Zone plate has one focus whereas lens has multiple focii
c) Both are correct
d) Zone plate has one focus whereas a lens has infinite
393. The magnetic field in a plane electromagnetic wave is given by
𝐵𝑦 = 2 × 10−7 sin(0.5 × 103 𝑥 + 1.5 × 1011 𝑡)
This electromagnetic wave is
a) A visible light b) An infrared wave c) A microwave d) A radio wave
394. In Young’s double slit experiment, the spacing between the slits is 𝑑 and wavelength of light used is 6000Å.
If the angular width of a fringe formed on a distance screen is 1°, then value of 𝑑 is
a) 1 mm b) 0.05 mm c) 0.03 mm d) 0.01 mm
395. What is the minimum thickness of a thin film required for constructive interference in the reflected light
from it?
Given, the refractive index of the film = 1.5, wavelength of the light incident on the film = 600 nm
a) 100 nm b) 300nm c) 50 nm d) 200 nm
396. In Young’s double slit experiment, 12 fringes are obtained to be formed in a certain segment of the screen
when light of wavelength 600 mm is used. If the wavelength of light is changed to 400 mm, number of
fringes observed in the same segment of the screen is given by
a) 12 b) 18 c) 24 d) 30
397. A Young’s double slit experiment uses a monochromatic source. The shape of the interference fringes
formed on a screen is
a) Hyperbola b) Circle c) Straight line d) Parabola
398. The frequency of light ray having the wavelength 3000Å is
a) 9 × 1013 𝑐𝑦𝑐𝑙𝑒𝑠/𝑠 b) 1015 𝑐𝑦𝑐𝑙𝑒𝑠/𝑠 c) 90 𝑐𝑦𝑐𝑙𝑒𝑠/𝑠 d) 3000 𝑐𝑦𝑐𝑙𝑒𝑠/𝑠
399. Two light rays having the same wavelength 𝜆 in vacuum are in phase initially. Then the first ray travels a
path 𝐿1 through a medium of refractive index 𝑛1 while the second ray travels a path of length 𝐿2 through a
medium of refractive index 𝑛2 . The two waves are then combined to produce interference. The two waves
are then combined to produce interference. The phase difference between the two waves is
2𝜋 2𝜋 2𝜋 2𝜋 𝐿1 − 𝐿2
a) (𝐿2 − 𝐿1 ) b) (𝑛1 𝐿1 − 𝑛2 𝐿2 ) c) (𝑛2 𝐿1 − 𝑛1 𝐿2 ) d) ( )
𝜆 𝜆 𝜆 𝜆 𝑛1 − 𝑛2
400. A beam of light of wavelength 600 𝑛𝑚 from a distant source falls on a single slit 1 𝑚𝑚 wide and the
resulting diffraction pattern is observed on a screen 2 𝑚 away. The distance between the first dark fringes
on either side of the central bright fringe is
a) 1.2 𝑚𝑚 b) 1.2 𝑐𝑚 c) 2.4 𝑐𝑚 d) 2.4 𝑚𝑚
401. If an interference pattern has maximum and minimum intensities in 36 : 1 ratio then what will be the ratio
of amplitudes
a) 5 : 7 b) 7 : 4 c) 4 : 7 d) 7 : 5
402. The two coherent sources of equal intensity produce maximum intensity of 100 units at a point. If the
intensity of one of the sources is reduced by 36% by reducing its width then the intensity of light at the
same point will be
a) 90 b) 89 c) 67 d) 81
403. A polaroid is placed at 45° to an incoming light of intensity 𝐼0 . Now the intensity of light passing through
polaroid after polarization would be
a) 𝐼0 b) 𝐼0 /2 c) 𝐼0 /4 d) Zero
404. The electric field associated with an 𝑒.m. wave in vacuum is given by 𝐸 = 𝑖̂ 40 cos(𝑘𝑧 − 6 × 108 𝑡), where
⃗
𝐸, 𝑧 and 𝑡 are in 𝑣𝑜𝑙𝑡/𝑚, meter and seconds respectively. The value of wave vector 𝑘 is
a) 2𝑚 −1 b) 0.5𝑚 −1 c) 6𝑚 −1 d) 3𝑚 −1
405. When unpolarised light beam is incident from air onto glass (𝑛 = 1.5) at the polarizing angle
a) Reflected beam is polarized 100 percent
b) Reflected and refracted beams are partially polarized
c) The reason for (a) is that almost all the light is reflected
d) All of the above
406. Two Nicols are oriented with their principal planes making an angle of 60°. The percentage of incident
unpolarised light which passes through the system is
a) 50% b) 100% c) 12.5% d) 37.5%
407. Specific rotation of sugar solution is 0.01 SI units. 200𝑘𝑔𝑚 of impure sugar solution is taken in a
−3

polarimeter tube of length 0.25𝑚 and an optical rotation of 0.4 𝑟𝑎𝑑 is observed. The percentage of purity
of sugar is the sample is
a) 80% b) 89% c) 11% d) 20%
408. For skywave propagation of a 10 𝑀𝐻𝑧 signal, what should be the maximum electron density in ionosphere
a) ~1.2 × 1012 𝑚 −3 b) ~106 𝑚 −3 c) ~1014 𝑚 −3 d) ~1022 𝑚 −3
409. In Young’s double slit experiment, let 𝑆1 and𝑆2 be the two slits and C be the centre of the screen. If
∠𝑆1 𝐶𝑆2 = θ and 𝜆 is the wavelength, the fringe width will be
𝜆
𝜆θ 𝜆
a) θ b) c) 2λ/θ d)
2θ
410. An electromagnetic wave in vacuum has the electric and magnetic field 𝐸⃗and 𝐵
⃗ , which are always
perpendicular to each other. The direction of polarization is given by 𝑋 and that of wave propagation by 𝑘⃗ .
Then
a) 𝑋||𝐵
⃗ and 𝑘⃗||𝐵
⃗ × 𝐸⃗ b) 𝑋||𝐸⃗ and 𝑘⃗||𝐸⃗ × 𝐵
⃗ c) 𝑋 ||𝐵
⃗ and 𝑘⃗||𝐸⃗ × 𝐵
⃗ d) 𝑋||𝐸⃗ and 𝑘⃗||𝐵
⃗ × 𝐸⃗
411. A circular disc is placed in front of a narrow source. When the point of observation is at a distance of
1 𝑚𝑒𝑡𝑒𝑟 from the disc, then the disc covers first HPZ. The intensity at this point is 𝐼0 . The intensity at a
point distance 25 𝑐𝑚 from the disc will be (If ratio of consecutive amplitude of HPZ is 0.9)
a) 𝐼1 = 0.531𝐼0 b) 𝐼1 = 0.053𝐼0 c) 𝐼1 = 53𝐼0 d) 𝐼1 = 5.03𝐼0
412. The pressure exerted by an electromagnetic wave of intensity 𝐼(𝑤𝑎𝑡𝑡𝑠/𝑚 ) on a nonreflecting surface is [𝑐
2

is the velocity of light]

a) 𝐼𝑐 b) 𝐼𝑐 2 c) 𝐼/𝑐 d) 𝐼/𝑐 2
413. Two polaroids are placed in the path of unpolarised beam of intensity 𝐼0 such that no light is emitted from
the second polaroid. If a third polaroid whose polarization axis makes an angle 𝜃 with the polarization axis
of first polaroid, is placed between these polaroids then the intensity of light emerging from the last
polaroid will be
𝐼0 𝐼0 𝐼0
a) ( ) sin2 2𝜃 b) ( ) sin2 2𝜃 c) ( ) cos4 2𝜃 d) 𝐼0 cos4 𝜃
8 4 2
414. In the spectrum of light of a luminous heavenly body the wavelength of a spectral line is measured to be
4747Å while actual wavelength of the line is 4700Å. The relative velocity of the heavenly body with
respect to earth will be (velocity of light is 3 × 108 𝑚/𝑠)
a) 3 × 105 𝑚/𝑠 moving towards the earth b) 3 × 105 𝑚/𝑠 moving away from the earth
c) 3 × 106 𝑚/𝑠 moving towards the earth d) 3 × 106 𝑚/𝑠 moving away from the earth
415. Two coherent sources of light can be obtained by
a) Two different lamps
b) Two different lamps but of the same power
c) Two different lamps of same power and having the same colour
d) None of the above
416. Maximum diffraction takes place in a given slit for
a) 𝛾 − rays b) Ultraviolet light
c) Infrared light d) Radiowaves
417. A single slit of width 𝑎 is illuminated by violet light of wavelength 400 𝑛𝑚 and the width of the diffraction
 pattern is measured as 𝑦. When half of the slit width is covered and illuminated by yellow light of
wavelength 600 𝑛𝑚, the width of the diffraction pattern is
a) The pattern vanishes and the width is zero b) 𝑦/3
c) 3𝑦 d) None of these
418. If a torch is used in place of monochromatic light in Young’s experiment what will happen
a) Fringe will appear for a moment then it will disappear
b) Fringes will occur as from monochromatic light
c) Only bright fringes will appear
d) No fringes will appear
419. When one of the slits of Young’s experiment is covered with a transparent sheet of thickness 4.8 𝑚𝑚, the
central fringe shifts to a position originally occupied by the 30th bright fringe. What should be the
thickness of the sheet if the central fringe has to shift to the position occupied by 20th bright fringe
a) 3.8 𝑚𝑚 b) 1.6 𝑚𝑚 c) 7.6 𝑚𝑚 d) 3.2 𝑚𝑚
420. If we observe the single slit Frunhofer diffraction with wavelength 𝜆 and slit width e, the width of the
central maxima is 2𝜃. On decreasing the slit width for the same 𝜆
a) θ increases
b) θ remains unchanged
c) θ decreases
d) θ increases or decreases depending on the intensity of light
421. The slits in a Young’s double slit experiment have equal widths and the source is placed symmetrically
relative to the slits. The intensity at the central fringesis𝐼0 . If one of the slits is closed, the intensity at this
point will be
a) 𝐼0 b) 𝐼0 /4 c) 𝐼0 /2 d) 4𝐼0
422. Two luminous point sources separated by a certain distance are at 10 km from an observer. If the
aperture of his eye is 2.5 × 10−3 m and the wavelength of light used is 500 nm, the distance of separation
between the point sources just seen to be resolved is
a) 12.2 m b) 24.2 m c) 2.44 m d) 1.22 m
423. Light appears to travel in straight lines since
a) It is not absorbed by the atmosphere b) It is reflected by the atmosphere
c) Its wavelength is very small d) Its velocity is very large
424. In a Young’s double slit experimental arrangement shown here, if a mica sheet of thickness 𝑡 and refractive
index 𝜇 is placed in front of the slit 𝑆1 , then the path difference (𝑆1 𝑃 − 𝑆2 𝑃)

S1

S2
P
Screen
Slit
a) Decreases by (𝜇 − 1)𝑡 b) Increases by (𝜇 − 1)𝑡
c) Does not change d) Increases by 𝜇𝑡
425. A ray of light of intensity 𝐼 is incident on a parallel glass-slab at a point 𝐴 as shown in fig. It undergoes
partial reflection and refraction. At each reflection 25% of incident energy is reflected. The rays 𝐴𝐵 and
𝐴′𝐵′ undergo interference. The ratio 𝐼max /𝐼min is
B B
I

A A

C
a) 4 : 1 b) 8 : 1 c) 7 : 1 d) 49 : 1
426. An optically active compound
a) Rotates the plane polarized light
b) Changing the direction of polarized light
c) Do not allow plane polarized light to pass through
d) None of the above
427. In Young’s double slit experiment, the length if band is 1 mm. The ring width is 1.021 mm. The number of
fringe is
a) 45 b) 46 c) 47 d) 48
428. A parallel beam of light of wavelength 3141.59Å is incident on a small aperture. After passing through the
aperture, the beam is no longer parallel but diverges at 1° to the incident direction. What is the diameter of
the aperture?
a) 180m b) 18μm c) 1.8m d) 0.18m
429. In a double slit interference experiment, the distance between the slits is 0.05 cm and screen is 2 m away
from the slits. The wavelength of light is 6000Å. The distance between the fringe is
a) 0.24 cm b) 0.12 cm c) 1.24 cm d) 2.28 cm
430. When a plane polarized light is passed through an analyser and analyser is rotated through 90°, the
intensity of the emerging light
a) Varies between a maximum and minimum b) Becomes zero
c) Does not vary d) Varies between a maximum and zero
431. Which scientist experimentally proved the existence of electromagnetic waves
a) Sir J.C.Bose b) Maxwell c) Marconi d) Hertz
432. The dielectric constant of air is 1.006. The speed of electromagnetic wave travelling in air is 𝑎 × 108 𝑚𝑠 −1 ,
where 𝑎 is about
a) 3 b) 3.88 c) 2.5 d) 3.2
433. Figure represents a glass plate placed vertically on a horizontal table with a beam of unpolarised light
falling on its surface at the polarizing angle of 57° with the normal. The electric vector in the reflected light
on screen 𝑆 will vibrate with respect to the plane of incidence in a

57° 57°
S

a) Vertical plane b) Horizontal plane

c) Plane making an angle of 45° with the vertical d) Plane making an angle of 57° with the horizontal
434. When the wavelength of light coming from a distant star is measured it is found shifted towards red. Then
the conclusion is
a) The star is approaching the observer b) The star recedes away from earth
c) There is gravitational effect on the light d) The star remains stationary
435. What will be the angular width of central maxima in Fraunhoffer diffraction when light of wavelength
6000Å is used and slit width is 12 × 10−5 𝑐𝑚
a) 2 𝑟𝑎𝑑 b) 3 𝑟𝑎𝑑 c) 1 𝑟𝑎𝑑 d) 8 𝑟𝑎𝑑
436. In a Fresnel biprism experiment, the two positions of lens give separation between the slits as 16 cm and 9
cm, respectively. What is the actual distance of separation?
a) 12.5 cm b) 12 cm c) 13 cm d) 14 cm
437. In a Young’s double slit experiment, the two slits act as coherent sources of waves of equal amplitude A
and wavelength 𝜆. In another experiment with the same arrangement the two slits are made to act as
incoherent sources of waves of same amplitude and wavelength. If the intensity at the middle point of the
𝐼
screen in the first case is 𝐼1 and in the second case𝐼2 , then the ratio𝐼1 is
2
a) 4 b) 2 c) 1 d) 0.5
438. Two waves are represented by the equations 𝑦1 = 𝑎 sin 𝜔𝑡and 𝑦2 = 𝑎 cos 𝜔𝑡. The first wave
a) Leads the second by 𝜋 b) Lags the second by 𝜋
𝜋 𝜋
c) Leads the second by 2 d) Lags the second by 2
439. A thin mica sheet of thickness 2 × 10−6 𝑚 and refractive index (𝜇 = 1.5) is introduced in the path of the
first wave. The wavelength of the wave used is 5000 Å. The central bright maximum will shift
a) 2 fringes upward b) 2 fringes downward c) 10 fringes upward d) None of these
440. Two beams of light of intensity 𝐼1 and 𝐼2 interfere to give an interference pattern. If the ratio of maximum
25 𝐼
intensity to that of minimum intensity is 9
, then 𝐼1 is
2
a) 5/3 b) 4 81 d) 16
c)
625
441. The condition for diffraction of 𝑚 th order minima is
a) 𝑑 sin θ𝑚 = 𝑚𝜆, 𝑚 = 1, 2, 3, …
𝑚𝜆
b) 𝑑 sin θ𝑚 = , 𝑚 = 1, 2, 3, …
2
𝜆
c) 𝑑 sin θ𝑚 = (𝑚 + 1) , 𝑚 = 1, 2, 3, …
2
𝜆
d) 𝑑 sin θ𝑚 = (𝑚 − 1) , 𝑚 = 1, 2, 3, …
2
442. A plane wavefront(𝜆 = 6 × 10−7 𝑚) falls on a slit 0.4 𝑚𝑚 wide. A convex lens of focal length 0.8𝑚 placed
behind the slit focusses the light on a screen. What is the linear diameter of second maximum
a) 6𝑚𝑚 b) 12𝑚𝑚 c) 3𝑚𝑚 d) 9𝑚𝑚
443. Two beams of light will not give rise to an interference pattern, if
a) They are coherent
b) They have the same wavelength
c) They are linearly polarized perpendicular to each other
d) They are not monochromatic
444. A plane electromagnetic wave is incident on a material surface. If the wave delivers momentum 𝑝 and
energy 𝐸, then
a) 𝑝 = 0, 𝐸 = 0 b) 𝑝 ≠ 0, 𝐸 ≠ 0 c) 𝑝 ≠ 0, 𝐸 = 0 d) 𝑝 = 0, 𝐸 ≠ 0
445. Which of the following cannot be explained on the basis of wave nature of light?
(i) Polarization
(ii) Optical activity
(iii) Photoelectric effect
(iv) Compton effect
a) (ii) and (iv) b) (ii) and (iii) c) (i) and (iii) d) (ii) and (iv)
446. The magnetic field amplitude of an electromagnetic wave is 2 × 10 𝑇. It’s electric field amplitude if the
−7

wave is travelling in free space is :

a) 6𝑉𝑚 −1 b) 60𝑉𝑚 −1 c) 10/6𝑉𝑚 −1 d) None of these
447. In the experiment of diffraction at a single slit, if the slit width is decreased, the width of the central
maximum
a) Increases in both Fresnel and Fraunhoffer diffraction
b) Decreases both in Fresnal and Fraunhoffer diffraction
c) Increases in Fresnel diffraction but decreases in Fraunhoffer diffraction
d) Decreases in Fresnel diffraction but increases in Fraunhoffer diffraction
448. A star is moving towards the earth with a speed of 4.5 × 106 𝑚/𝑠. If the true wavelength of a certain line in
the spectrum received from the star is 5890 Å, its apparent wavelength will be about (𝑐 = 3 × 108 𝑚/𝑠)
a) 5890Å b) 5978Å c) 5802Å d) 5896Å
449. To observe diffraction, the size of an aperture
a) Should be of the same orders wavelength should be much larger than the wavelength
b) Should be much larger than the wavelength
 c) Have no relation to wavelength
d) Should be exactly 𝜆/2
450. In the set up shown in figure, the two slits 𝑆1 and 𝑆2 are not equidistant from the slit S. The central fringe at
O is, then

a) Always bright
b) Always dark
c) Either dark or bright depending on the position of S
d) Neither dark nor bright
451. Two identical light sources 𝑆1 and 𝑆2 emit light of same wavelength 𝜆. These light rays will exhibit
interference if
a) Their phase differences remain constant
b) Their phases are distributed randomly
c) Their light intensities remain constant
d) Their light intensities change randomly
452. A parallel beam of light of wavelength 6000Å gets diffracted by a single silt of width 0.3 mm. The angular
position of the first minima of diffracted light is
a) 6 × 10−3 rad b) 1.8 × 10−3 rad c) 3 × 10−3 rad d) 2 × 10−3 rad
453. Yellow light is used in single slit diffraction experiment with slit width 0.6 mm. If yellow light is replaced
by X-rays, then the pattern will reveal that
a) No diffraction pattern b) That the central maxima narrower
c) Less number of fringes d) More number of fringes
454. Figure here shows 𝑃 and 𝑄 as two equally intense coherent sources emitting radiations of wavelength
20 𝑚. The separation 𝑃𝑄 is 5.0 𝑚 and phase of 𝑃 is ahead of the phase of 𝑄 by 90°. 𝐴, 𝐵 and 𝐶 are three
distant points of observation equidistant from the mid-point of 𝑃𝑄. The intensity of radiations at 𝐴, 𝐵, 𝐶
will bear the ratio
B

P Q

C A

a) 0 : 1 : 4 b) 4 : 1 : 0 c) 0 : 1 : 2 d) 2 : 1 : 0
455. In a two-slit experiment, with monochromatic light, fringes are obtained on a screen placed at some
distance from the slits. If the screen is moved by 5 × 10−2 𝑚 towards slits, the change in fringe width is
10−3 𝑚 Then the wavelength of light used is (given that distance between the slits is 0.03𝑚𝑚)
a) 4000 Å b) 4500 Å c) 5000 Å d) 6000 Å
456. A light of wavelength 5890 Å falls normally on a thin air film. The minimum thickness of the film such that
the film appears dark in reflected light is
a) 2.945 × 10−7 𝑚 b) 3.945 × 10−7 𝑚 c) 4.95 × 10−7 𝑚 d) 1.945 × 10−7 𝑚
457. Wave which cannot travel in vacuum is
a) 𝑋-rays b) Infrasonic c) Ultraviolet d) Radiowaves
458. Which radiation in sunlight, causes heating effect
a) Ultraviolet b) Infrared c) Visible light d) All of these
459. A thin film of soap solution (𝑛 = 1.4) lies on the top of a glass plate 𝑛 = 1.5 . When visible light is
( )
incident almost normal to the plate, two adjacent reflection maxima are observed at two wavelengths 400
 and 630 nm. The minimum thickness of the soap solution is
a) 420 nm b) 450 nm c) 630 nm d) 1260 nm
460. In a Fresnel’s diffraction arrangement, the screen is at a distance of 2 meter from a circular aperture. It is
found that for light of wavelengths 𝜆1 and 𝜆2 , the radius of 4𝑡ℎ zone for 𝜆1 coincides with the radius of 5th
zone for 𝜆2 . Then the ratio 𝜆1 : 𝜆2 is
a) √4/5 b) √5/4 c) 5/4 d) 4/5
461. Radio waves and visible light in vacuum have
a) Same velocity but different wavelength b) Continuous emission spectrum
c) Band absorption spectrum d) Line emission spectrum
462. Laser beams are used to measure long distance because
a) They are monochromatic b) They are highly polarized
c) They are coherent d) They have high degree of parallelism
463. In a Young’s double-slit experiment the fringe width is 0.2𝑚𝑚. If the wavelength of light used is increased
by 10% and the separation between the slits is also increased by 10%, the fringe width will be
a) 0.20 𝑚𝑚 b) 0.401 𝑚𝑚 c) 0.242 𝑚𝑚 d) 0.165 𝑚𝑚
464. In Young’s experiment, using red light (𝜆 = 6600Å), 60 fringes are seen in the field of view. How many
fringes will be seen by using violet light (𝜆 = 4400Å)?
a) 10 b) 20 c) 45 d) 90
465. Which of the following represents an infrared wavelength
a) 10−4 𝑐𝑚 b) 10−5 𝑐𝑚 c) 10−6 𝑐𝑚 d) 10−7 𝑐𝑚
466. In Young’s double slit experiment, a third slit is made in between the double slits. Then
a) Fringes of unequal width are formed
b) Contrast between bright and dark fringes is reduced
c) Intensity of fringes totally disappears
d) Only bright light is observed on the screen
467. When a thin transparent plate of thickness 𝑡 and refractive index 𝜇 is placed in the path of one of the two
interfering waves of light, then the path difference changes by
(𝜇 + 1) (𝜇 − 1)
a) (𝜇 + 1)𝑡 b) (𝜇 − 1)𝑡 c) d)
𝑡 𝑡
468. In Huygen’s wave theory, the locus of all points in the same state of vibration is called
a) A half period zone b) Oscillator c) A wave-front d) A ray
469. An interference pattern was made by using red light. If the red light changes with blue light, the fringes
will become
a) Wider b) Narrower c) Fainter d) Brighter
470. A plane wave of wavelength 6250 Å is incident normally on a slit of width 2 × 10−2 cm. The width of the
principal maximum on a screen distant 50 cm will be
a) 312.5 × 10−3 cm b) 312.5 × 10−4 cm c) 312 cm d) 312.5 × 10−5 cm
471. In the interference pattern, energy is
a) Created at the position of maxima b) Destroyed at the position of minima
c) Conserved but is redistributed d) None of the above
472. A single slit is located effectively at infinity in front of a lens of focal length 1 m and it is illuminated
normally with light of wavelength 600 nm. The first minima on either side of central maximum are
separated by 4 mm. Width of the slit is ……
a) 0.1 mm b) 0.2 mm c) 0.3 mm d) 0.4 mm
473. The wave front due to a source situated at infinity is
a) Spherical b) Cylindrical c) Planar d) None of these
474. A parallel plate capacitor with plate area 𝐴 and separation between the plates 𝑑, is charged by a constant
current 𝑖, consider a plane surface of area 𝐴/2 parallel to the plates and drawn symmetrically between the
plates, the displacement current through this area, will be
 𝑖 𝑖 d) None of these
a) 𝑖 b) c)
2 4
475. Which one of the following have minimum wavelength
a) Ultraviolet rays b) Cosmic rays c) 𝑋-rays d) 𝛾-rays
476. The width of the diffraction band varies
a) Inversely as the wavelength
b) Directly as the width of the slit
c) Directly as the distance between the slit and the screen
d) Inversely as the size of the source from which the slit is illuminated
477. In which of the following is the interference due to the division of wavefront?
a) Young’s double slit experiment
b) Fresnel’s biprism experiment
c) Liyod’s mirror experiment
d) Demonstration colours of thin film
478. In Fresnel’s biprism experiment, on increasing the prism angle, fringe width will
a) Increase b) Decrease
c) Remain unchanged d) Depend on the position of object
479. A plane electromagnetic wave of wave intensity 6 𝑊/𝑚2 strikes a small mirror area 40 𝑐𝑚 2 , held
perpendicular to the approaching wave. The momentum transferred by the wave to the mirror each
second will be
a) 6.4 × 10−7 𝑘𝑔 − 𝑚/𝑠 2 b) 4.8 × 10−8 𝑘𝑔 − 𝑚/𝑠 2
c) 3.2 × 10−9 𝑘𝑔 − 𝑚/𝑠 2 d) 1.6 × 10−10 𝑘𝑔 − 𝑚/𝑠 2
480. If 𝐼0 is the intensity of the principal maximum in the single slit diffraction pattern, then what will be its
intensity when the slit width is doubled?
𝐼
a) 2𝐼0 b) 4𝐼0 c) 𝐼0 d) 0
2
481. In a two slits experiment with monochromatic light, fringes are obtained on a screen placed at some
distance from the slits. If the screen is moved by 5 × 10−2 m towards the slits, the change in fringe width is
3 × 10−5 m. If separation between the slits is 10−3 m, the wavelength of light used is
a) 4500 Å b) 3000 Å c) 5000 Å d) 6000 Å
482. The coherent curve between fringe width 𝛽 and distance between the slits (𝑑)in figure is

a) b) c) d)

483. The rectilinear propagation of light in a medium is due to its

a) High Velocity b) Large wavelength c) High frequency d) Source
484. Two coherent sources 𝑆1 and 𝑆2 are separated by a distance four times the wavelength 𝜆 of the source. The
sources lies along 𝑦 axis whereas a detector moves along + 𝑥 axis. Leaving the origin and far off points the
number of points where maxima are observed is
a) 2 b) 3 c) 4 d) 5
485. What will be the angle of diffraction for the first order maximum due to Fraunhofer diffraction by a single
slit of width 0.50 mm, using light of wavelength 500 nm?
a) 1 × 10−3 rad b) 3 × 10−3 rad c) 1.5 × 10−4 rad d) 1.5 × 10−3 rad
486. The intensity ratio of two coherent sources of light is 𝑝. They are interfering in some region and produce
interference pattern. Then the fringe visibility is
1+𝑝 2√𝑝 𝑝 2𝑝
a) b) c) d)
2√𝑝 1+𝑝 1+𝑝 1+𝑝
487. Two sources of same intensity interfere at a point and produced resultant 𝐼. When one source is removed,
the intensity at that point will be
 a) 𝐼 b) 𝐼/2 c) 𝐼/4 d) 𝐼/3
488. Colours in thin films are due to
a) Diffraction phenomenon b) Scattering phenomenon
c) Interference phenomenon d) Polarization phenomenon
489. Interference was observed in interference chamber when air was present, now the chamber is evacuated
and if the same light is used, a careful observer will see
a) No interference
b) Interference with bright bands
c) Interference with dark bands
d) Interference in which width of the fringe will be slightly increased
490. To demonstrate the phenomenon of interference, we require two sources which emit radiation
a) Of the same frequency and having a definite phase b) Of nearly the same frequency
relationship
c) Of the same frequency d) Of different wavelengths
491. A beam of unpolarized light having flux 10−3 W falls normally on a polarizer of cross sectional area 3 ×
10−4 m2 . The polarizer rotates with an angular frequency of 31.4 rads−1 . The energy of light passing
through the polarizer per revolution will be
a) 10−4 J b) 10−3 J c) 10−2 J d) 10−1 J
492. In a double slit experiment, the screen is placed at a distance of 1.25 m from the slits. When the apparatus
is immersed in water (𝜇𝑤 = 4/3), the angular width of a fringe is found to be 0.2°. When the experiment
is performed in air with same set up, the angular width of the fringe is
a) 0.4° b) 0.27° c) 0.35° d) 0.15°
493. The wave theory of light was given by
a) Maxwell b) Planck c) Huygen d) Young
494. In Young’s double slit experiment, the two slit act as coherent sources if equal amplitude A and
wavelength𝜆. In another experiment with the same setup, the two slits are sources of equal amplitude 𝐴
and wavelength 𝜆 but are incoherent. The ratio of the intensity of light at the mid-point of the screen in the
first case to that in the second case is
a) 2:1 b) 1:2 c) 3:4 d) 4:3
495. In Young’s double slit experiment with sodium vapour lamp of wavelength 589 nm and the slits 0.589 mm
apart, the half angular width of the central maximum is
a) sin−1(0.01) b) sin−1(0.0001) c) sin−1(0.001) d) sin−1(0.1)
496. A star emitting light of wavelength 5896 Å is moving away from the earth with a speed of 3600 𝑘𝑚/𝑠. The
wavelength of light observed on earth will
(𝑐 = 3 × 108 𝑚/𝑠 is the speed of light)
a) Decrease by 5825.25 Å b) Increase by 5966.75 Å
c) Decrease by 70.75 Å d) Increase by 70.75 Å
497. In Young’s experiment, the ratio of maximum to minimum intensities of the fringe system is 4:1. The
amplitudes of the coherent sources are in the ratio
a) 4 : 1 b) 3 : 1 c) 2 : 1 d) 1 : 1
498. Consider Fraunhoffer diffraction pattern obtained with a single slit at normal incidence. At the angular
position of first diffraction minimum, the phase difference between the wavelets from the opposite edges
of the slit is
a) 𝜋/4 b) 𝜋/2 c) 𝜋 d) 2𝜋
499. Light waves can propagate through vacuum but sound waves cannot do so. Mark the wrong statement
a) Light waves are transverse electromagnetic waves and do not require any medium for their
propagation
b) Sound waves are longitudinal mechanical waves and require inertial and elastic medium for their
propagation
c) Velocity of light for all transparent media is same
 d) Velocity of light for all transparent media is different
500. The electric and magnetic field of an electromagnetic wave are
a) In phase and parallel to each other
b) In opposite phase and perpendicular to each other
c) In opposite phase and parallel to each other
d) In phase and perpendicular to each other
501. In Young’s experiment, monochromatic light is used to illuminate the two slits 𝐴and 𝐵. Interference
fringes are observed on a screen placed in front of the slits. Now if a thin glass plate is placed normally in
the path of the beam coming from the slit

a) The fringes will disappear

b) The fringe width will increase
c) The fringe width will decrease
d) There will be no change in the fringe width but the pattern shifts
502. In the diffraction pattern of a single slit
a) All bands are uniformly bright b) All bands are uniformly wide
c) Central band is narrower d) Central band is wider
503. Maxwell’s equations describe the fundamental laws of
a) Electricity only b) Magnetism only c) Mechanics only d) Both (a) and (b)
504. Which of the following diagrams represent the variation of electric field vector with time for a cirularly
polarized light?

a) b)

c) d)

505. In Young’s double slit experiment, slit separation is 0.6 mm and the separation between slit and screen is
1.2 m. The angular width is (the wavelength of light used is 4800 Å
a) 30 rad b) 8 × 10−4 rad c) 12 rad d) 70.5 rad
506. The coherent formula for fringe visibility is
𝐼max − 𝐼min 𝐼max + 𝐼min 𝐼max 𝐼min
a) 𝑉 = b) 𝑉 = c) 𝑉 = d) 𝑉 =
𝐼max + 𝐼min 𝐼max − 𝐼min 𝐼min 𝐼max
507. Among the two interfering monochromatic sources 𝐴and 𝐵; 𝐴 is ahead of 𝐵 in phase by 66°. If the
observation be taken from point 𝑃, such that 𝑃𝐵 − 𝑃𝐴 = 𝜆/4. Then the phase difference between the
waves from 𝐴 and 𝐵 reaching 𝑃 is
a) 156° b) 140° c) 136° d) 126°
d) There are no refracted waves
1 (b) 1 3
2

The polarization is the property of (2 + √8)

electromagnetic waves such as light which = 2
1 3
describes the direction of their transverse electric ( −√ )
2 8
field. More generally, the polarization of
transverse wave describes the direction of 7 (c)
oscillation, in the plane perpendicular to the Intensity of light from 𝐶2 = 𝐼0
direction of travel. Longitudinal waves such as
sound waves do not exhibit polarization, becomes On rotating through 60°,
for these waves the direction of oscillation is
along the direction of travel. 𝐼 = 𝐼0 cos2 60° (law of Malus)

3 (d) 1 2
= 𝐼0 ( ) = 𝐼0 /4
ℎ𝑐 6.6 × 10−34 × 3 × 108 2
𝐸= = = 0.94 × 10−24
𝜆 21 × 10−2 9 (d)
= 10−24 𝐽
From (𝜇 − 1)𝑡 = 𝑛𝜆
4 (a)
𝜆𝐷 10 (c)
𝛽= ⇒𝛽∝𝜆
𝑑 Critical angle,𝐶 = sin−1(0.6)
6 (a) sin(𝐶 ) = 0.6
The intensity of light reflected from upper surface 1 1
is 𝜇= =
sin 𝐶 0.6
1
Polarizing angle 𝑖𝑝 = tan−1 (𝜇) = tan−1 (0.6)
𝐼1 = 𝐼0 × 25%
= tan−1 (1.6667)
25 12 (c)
= 𝐼0 ×
100 1
Speed of light of vacuum 𝑐 = 𝜇 𝜀 and in another
√ 0 0
𝐼0 1
= medium 𝑣 = 𝜇𝜀
4 √

𝑐 𝜇𝜀 𝑐
The intensity of transmitted light from upper ∴ =√ = √𝜇𝑟 𝐾 ⇒ 𝑣 =
surface is 𝑣 𝜇0 𝜀0 √𝜇𝑟 𝐾
14 (c)
𝐼0 3𝐼0 𝑐
𝐼 = 𝐼0 − = From Brewster’s law 𝜇 = tan 𝑖𝑝 ⇒ 𝑣 =
4 4
tan 60° = √3
∴ The intensity of reflected light from upper 𝑐 3 × 108
surface is ⇒𝑣= = = √3 × 108 𝑚/𝑠
√3 √3
3𝐼0 50 3𝐼0 15 (d)
𝐼2 = × = The phase difference (𝜙) between the wavelets
4 100 8
from the top edge and the bottom edge of the slit
2 2𝜋
𝐼𝑚𝑎𝑥 (√𝐼1 + √𝐼2 ) is 𝜙 = (𝑑 sin 𝜃) where 𝑑 is the slit width. The
∴ = 𝜆
𝐼𝑚𝑖𝑛 (√𝐼 − √𝐼 )2 first minima of the diffraction pattern occurs at
1 2
𝜆 2𝜋 𝜆
2
sin 𝜃 = 𝑑 so 𝜙 = (𝑑 × ) = 2𝜋
𝜆 𝑑
3𝐼0
(√𝐼0 + √ ) 16 (a)
𝐼𝑚𝑎𝑥 4 8
∴ = Only transverse waves can be polarized
2
𝐼𝑚𝑖𝑛 𝐼 3𝐼0 17 (b)
(√ 40 − √ 8
)
As 𝜆blue < 𝜆red and width of diffraction bands is
directly proportional to 𝜆, therefore diffraction
bands become narrower and crowded

Page |1
18 (b) 𝐼2
= = 37.5%
When a Young’s double slit set up for interference 𝐼0
is shifted from air to within water then the fringe
width decreases. 26 (b)
19 (c) Here, 𝑎 = 2𝑚𝑚 = 2 × 10−3 𝑚
Deviation=𝑖𝑝 − 𝑟 = 20° 𝜆 = 500𝑛𝑚 = 500 × 10−9 𝑚 = 5 × 10−7 𝑚
𝐷 = 1𝑚
Also, 𝑖𝑝 = 𝑟 = 90° The distance between the first minima on either
side on a screen is
Solve to get 𝑟 = 34° 2𝜆𝐷 2 × 5 × 10−7 × 1
= =
𝑎 2 × 10−3
20 (b)
= 5 × 10 𝑚 = 0.5 × 10−3 𝑚 = 0.5𝑚𝑚
−4
Newton’s of oscillations in coherence length
27 (a)
𝑙 0.024
= 𝜆𝐷
𝜆 5900 × 10−10 𝛽= ⇒𝛽∝𝐷
4 𝑑
= 40677.9 = 4.068 × 10 𝛽1 𝐷1 𝛽1 − 𝛽2 𝐷1 − 𝐷2 ∆𝛽 𝛽2 𝜆2
21 (b) ⇒ = ⇒ = ⇒ = =
𝛽2 𝐷2 𝛽2 𝐷2 ∆𝐷 𝐷2 𝑑2
The angular distance (θ) is given by 3 × 10−5
⇒ 𝜆2 = −2
× 10−3 = 6 × 10−7 𝑚 = 6000Å
𝜆 5 × 10
𝜃= 28 (a)
𝑑
For a given time, optical path remain constant
𝜋
𝜃 = 2° = × 2, 𝜆 = 6980 Å
180 ∴ 𝜇1 𝑥1 = 𝜇2 𝑥2

= 6980 × 10−10 m Or 1.5 × 2 = 𝜇2 × 2.25

𝜆 6980 × 10−10 × 180 1.5 × 2 2 20 4

⇒𝑑= = ∴ 𝜇2 = = = =
𝜃 3.14 × 2 2.25 1.5 15 3

= 1.89 × 10−5 mm 29 (a)

As we know
⇒ 𝑑 = 2 × 10−5 mm
𝐷
𝛽= 𝜆 ….(i)
24 (a) 𝑑

In a single slit diffraction experiment, position of 1

And 𝜆 ∝ 𝜇 ….(ii)
minima is given by 𝑑 sin 𝜃 = 𝑛𝜆
𝜆
So for first minima of red sin 𝜃 = 1 × ( 𝑑𝑅 ) From Eqs. (i) and (ii),
and as first maxima is midway between first and
1
second minima, for wavelength 𝜆’, 𝛽∝𝜆∝
Its position will be 𝜇
𝜆′ + 2𝜆′ 3𝜆′ 1
𝑑 sin 𝜃 ′ = ⇒ sin 𝜃′ = ∴ 𝛽∝
2 2𝑑 𝜇
According to given condition sin 𝜃 = sin 𝜃 ′
2 2
⇒ 𝜆′ = 3 𝜆𝑅 so 𝜆′ = 3 × 660 = 440𝑛𝑚 = 4400Å The refractive index of water is greater than air,
25 (c) therefore fringe width will decrease.
If 𝐼0 is intensity of unpolarized light,
30 (b)
𝐼0 Infrared radiations reflected by low lying clouds
Then from 1st nicol, 𝐼1 = 2 and keeps the earth warm
From 2nd nicol, 𝐼2 = 𝐼1 cos2 (90° − 60°) 31 (b)
tan 𝑖𝑝 = 𝜇 = √3 ∴ 𝑖𝑝 = 60°
2
𝐼0 √3 3
= ( ) = 𝐼0 32 (d)
2 2 8

Page |2
 𝜆𝐷 𝜆𝐷 6000 × 10−10 × (40 × 10−2 )
𝛽= ⇒𝑑= =
𝑑 𝛽 0.012 × 10−2
= 0.2𝑐𝑚
33 (b)
2𝜆
Angular width 𝛽 = ⇒𝛽∝𝜆
𝑑
𝛽1 𝜆1 𝛽 6000
⇒ = ⇒ 70 = ⇒ 4200Å
𝛽2 𝜆2 𝛽 𝜆2
100 Intensity of light emitted from 𝑃3
35 (c)
Let the wavelength of monochromatic light in 𝐼0
𝐼1 = cos2 θ
glass be 𝜆𝑔 cm and in water be 𝜆𝑤 cm. 2

8
Intensity of light transmitted from last Polaroid
∴ Number of waves in 8 cm of glass=𝜆 , and
𝑔
8 𝑃2 = 𝐼1 𝑐𝑜𝑠 2 (90° − θ)
number of waves in 10 cm of glass = .
𝜆𝑤
𝐼0
𝑃2 = cos2 θ sin2 θ
8 10 𝜆𝑤 10 5 2
= or = =
𝜆𝑔 𝜆𝑤 𝜆𝑔 8 4
𝐼0
𝑃2 = (2 sin θ cos θ)2
Now, 𝜇𝑔 =
𝑐
and𝜇𝑤 =
𝑐 8
𝑣𝑔 𝑣𝑤
𝐼0
𝑃2 = sin2 2 θ
𝜇𝑔 𝑣𝑤 𝑣𝜆𝑤 5 8
∴ = = =
𝜇𝑤 𝑣𝑔 𝑣𝜆𝑔 4
38 (b)
5 5 4 5 Here, 𝑑 = 1 mm = 10−3 m,
𝜇𝑔 = 𝜇𝑤 = × =
4 4 3 3
𝜆 = 6.5 × 10−7 m

𝐷 = 1m
36 (d)
𝐷 1
𝜆𝐷 600 × 10−9 × 2 𝑥5 = 𝑛𝜆 = 5 × 6.5 × 10−7 × −3
𝛽= = = 12 × 10−4 m 𝑑 10
𝑑 1 × 10−3
= 32.5 × 10−4 m
So, distance between the first dark fringes on
either side of the central bright fringe 𝜆𝐷
𝑥3 = (2𝑛 − 1)
2𝑑
= 2𝛽
(2 × 3 − 1) × 6.5 × 10−7
= 2 × 12 × 10−4 m =
2 × 10−3
= 24 × 10−4 m = 16.25 × 10−4 m
= 2.4 mm 𝑥5 − 𝑥3 = (32.5 − 16.25)10−4 m
37 (a) = 16.25 × 10−4 m = 1.63 mm
Let initial intensity of light is 𝐼0 . So intensity of
𝐼
light after transmission from first Polaroid = 20 . 39 (b)
As metal as reflecting surface, for reflecting
surface radiation pressure
2𝑆 2 × 0.5
𝑃𝑟 = = = 0.332 × 10−8
𝑐 3 × 108
41 (a)
When distance between screen and source is D,
and d the distance between coherent sources,

Page |3
 then fringe width (W) is given by 𝜆 2𝜋 𝜆
sin θ = , so ϕ = (𝑑 × ) = 2𝜋
𝑑 𝜆 𝑑
𝐷𝜆
𝑊= 47 (c)
𝑑
1−𝑣/𝑐
According to Doppler’s principle 𝜆′ = 𝜆√ for
1+𝑣/𝑐

𝑣=𝑐
(1 − 0.8)
𝜆′ = 5500√ = 1833.3
1 + 0.8
∴ Shift = 5500 − 1833.3 = −3666.7
48 (c)
For the first minima 𝑑 sin 𝜃 = 𝜆
𝜆 5000 × 10−10
⇒ sin 𝜃 = ⇒ 𝜃 = sin−1 ( ) = 30°
𝑑 0.001 × 10−3
49 (d)
Distance of 𝑛𝑡ℎ dark fringe from central fringe
(2𝑛 − 1)𝜆𝐷
Where 𝜆 is wavelength of monochromatic light. 𝑥𝑛 =
2𝑑
(2 × 2 − 1)𝜆𝐷 3𝜆𝐷
𝑊𝑑 ∴ 𝑥2 = =
𝜆= 2𝑑 2𝑑
𝐷 3 × 𝜆 × 1
⇒ 1 × 10−3 = ⇒ 𝜆 = 6 × 10−5 𝑐𝑚
Given, 𝐷 = 1 m, 𝑑 = 1 mm = 10−3 m, 2 × 0.9 × 10−3
50 (a)
𝑊 = 0.06 cm = 0.06 × 10−2 m 𝑎2
2
(4×10−3 ) 𝑚 2
Fresnel distance 𝑍𝐹 = = = 32𝑚
𝜆 500×10−9𝑚
−2 −3
0.06 × 10 × 10 51 (c)
∴ 𝜆=
1 𝐼1 𝑎2 9
= =
𝐼2 𝑏2 1
= 6 × 10−7 m = 6000 Å
𝑎 3
42 (d) ∴ =
𝑏 1
𝑛1 𝜆1 = 𝑛2 𝜆2
⇒ 3 × 700 = 5 × 𝜆2 𝐼𝑚𝑎𝑥 (𝑎 + 𝑏)2 3+1 2
= =( ) = 4: 1
⇒ 𝜆2 = 420 nm 𝐼𝑚𝑖𝑛 (𝑎 − 𝑏)2 3−1
43 (b)
Rotation produced 𝜃 = 𝑆𝑖𝑐 52 (c)
Net rotation produced 𝜃𝑟 = 𝜃1 − 𝜃2 = 𝑙(𝑆1 𝑐1 − For maximum contrast, 𝐼1 = 𝐼2
𝑆2 𝑐2 )
53 (c)
= 0.29 × [0.01 × 60 − 0.02 × 30] = 0
𝜇 𝜇
44 (a) Wave impedance 𝑍 = √ 𝑟 × √ 0
𝜀𝑟 𝜀0
The essential condition for sustained interference
is constancy of phase difference 50
= √ × 376.6 = 1883Ω
45 (b) 2
1
Velocity of EM waves = = 3 × 108 𝑚/𝑠 = 56 (b)
√𝜇0𝜀0
For first diffraction minimum
velocity of light
46 (d) 𝑎 sin θ = λ
The phase difference (ϕ) between the wavelets
from the top edge and the bottom edge of the slit 𝜆
⇒𝑎=
2π
is ϕ = (𝑑 sin θ) where d is the slit width. The sin θ
λ
first minima of the diffraction pattern occurs at For first secondary maximum

Page |4
 3𝜆 3𝜆1 = 4𝜆2
𝑎 sin θ′ =
2 3 3 1770
⇒ λ2 = λ1 = × 590 = = 442.5 nm
3𝜆 1 36𝜆 sin θ
4 4 4
Or sin θ′ = 2
×𝑎 = 2
× 𝜆 69 (b)
𝑏
3 3 𝜃=𝑎+ 2
= × sin 30° = 𝜆
2 4 𝑏 𝑏
30 = 𝑎 + (5000)2 and 50 = 𝑎 + (4000)2
3 50°
Or θ′ = sin−1 ( ) Solving for 𝑎, we get 𝑎 = − 𝑝𝑒𝑟 𝑚𝑚
4 9
70 (a)
57 (c) Reflection phenomenon is shown by both particle
In double refraction light rays always splits into and wave nature of light
two rays (𝑂-ray &𝐸-ray). 𝑂-ray has same velocity 71 (a)
in all direction but 𝐸-ray has different velocity in When light reflects from denser surface phase
different direction change of 𝜋 occurs
For calcite 𝜇𝑒 < 𝜇0 ⇒ 𝑣𝑒 > 𝑣0 73 (a)
For quartz 𝜇𝑒 > 𝜇0 ⇒ 𝑣0 > 𝑣𝑒 Wavefront is the locus of all the particles which
59 (c) vibrates in the same phase
Let intensity of light coming from each slit of a 75 (d)
coherent source is I. As reflected and refracted rays are perpendicular
As first slit has width 4 times the width of the to each other, therefore, 𝑖𝑝 = 𝑖 = 60°
second slit, so
𝜇 = tan 𝑖𝑝 = tan 60° = √3 = 1.732
𝐼1 = 4𝐼 and 𝐼2 = 𝐼
76 (a)
2 2 𝐸0 2𝜋
𝐼𝑚𝑎𝑥 (√𝐼1 + √𝐼2 ) (√4𝐼 + √𝐼 ) 9 = 𝑐. also 𝑘 = and 𝜔 = 2𝜋𝑣
𝐵0 𝜆
∴ = 2 = 2 =
𝐼𝑚𝑖𝑛 (√𝐼 − √𝐼 ) (√4𝐼 − √𝐼 ) 1 These relation gives 𝐸0 𝑘 = 𝐵0 𝜔
1 2
77 (c)
60 (d) As 𝑥 = 𝑛1 𝛽1 = 𝑛2 𝛽2 = 𝑛2 𝜆1 = 𝑛2 𝜆2
𝜆𝑅𝑎𝑑𝑖𝑜𝑤𝑎𝑣𝑒 > 𝜆𝐼𝑅 𝑟𝑎𝑦𝑠 > 𝜆𝑈𝑉 𝑟𝑎𝑦𝑠 > 𝜆𝑋−𝑟𝑎𝑦𝑠
𝑛1 𝜆1 60 × 4000
61 (d) ∴ 𝑛2 = = = 40
𝜆2 6000
For interference, 𝜆 of both the waves must be
same 78 (c)
62 (b) According to Malus’ law
According to principle of diffraction
1 2 𝐼0
𝑎 sin θ = 𝑛𝜆 𝐼 = 𝐼0 cos2 θ = 𝐼0 (cos2 60°) = 𝐼0 × ( ) =
2 4
Where 𝑛 = order of secondary minimum 79 (d)
Ozone hole is depletion of ozone layer in
∴ 𝑎 sin 30° = 1 × (6500 × 10−10 )
stratosphere because of gases like CFC’S etc.
Or 𝑎 = 1.3 × 10−6 m 81 (b)
𝐼1 1
𝐼2
= 4 ⇒ 𝐼1 = 𝑘 and 𝐼2 = 4𝑘
Or 𝑎 = 1.3 micron
2√𝐼1 𝐼2 2√𝑘×4𝑘
∴ Fringe visibility 𝑉 = (𝐼 = = 0.8
63 (d) 1 +𝐼2 ) (𝑘+4𝑘)

𝜆 82 (b)
𝛽∝ In diffraction pattern, fringe width is proportional
𝑑
65 (c) to 𝜆. We know that wavelength of violet light is
Interference may be seen using two independent less than that of red light, so on replacing red light
lasers. with violet light, diffraction pattern would
66 (c)

Page |5
 become narrower.

83 (b)
𝐼 𝐼 1
𝐼′ = cos2 𝜃 = or cos 𝜃 = ∴ 𝜃 = 55°
2 6 √3
84 (c)
According to Plancks hypothesis, black bodies
emit radiations in the form of photons
85 (a)
1 1 1
The speed of light 𝐶 = = = = 0.25
√𝜇0 𝜀0 √2×8 4
86 (b)
Position of 𝑛th maxima from central maxima is
𝑛𝜆𝐷
given by 𝑥𝑛 = (𝜇 − 1)𝑡𝐷
𝑑 𝑥=
𝑑1 𝑛1 𝜆1 8𝜆1 4 𝜆1 𝑑
⇒ 𝑥𝑛 ∝ 𝑛𝜆 ⇒ = = = ( )
𝑑2 𝑛2 𝜆2 6𝜆2 3 𝜆2
Given, 𝜇 = 1.5, 𝑡 = 0.06 mm = 6 × 10−5 m
87 (b)
1 𝐷 = 2m, 𝑑 = 1 mm = 1 × 10−3 m
𝛽∝
𝑑
88 (d) Putting the values in the above relation, we get
As sound waves are longitudinal, therefore,
polarization of sound waves is not possible. (1.5 − 1) × 6 × 10−5 × 2
𝑥=
1 × 10−3
89 (c)
= 0.5 × 12 × 10−2 = 0.06 m = 6cm
𝑛1 𝜆1 = 𝑛2 𝜆2 ⇒ 3 × 590 = 4 × 𝜆2 ⇒ 𝜆2
= 442.5𝑛𝑚 95 (a)
90 (c)
Intensity, 𝐼0 = 𝐼1 + 𝐼2 + 2 √𝐼1 𝐼2
Here, 𝑋3 = 𝑋5
If 𝐼1 = 𝐼2 = 𝐼(Let)
3𝐷𝜆 5𝐷𝜆′
=
2𝑑 2𝑑 Then 𝐼0 = 4𝐼
𝜆 3
⇒ 3𝜆 = 5𝜆′ or 𝜆′
=5 When one slit is covered then 𝐼2 = 0

3 𝐼0
𝜆′ = × 700 nm = 420 nm ∴ 𝐼0′ = 𝐼 =
5 4

91 (a) 96 (d)
Light is electromagnetic in nature it does not Refractive index of a medium
require any material medium for its propagation
𝑛 = tan 𝑖𝑝
92 (a)
𝜆𝐷 𝛽𝑑 0.06×10−2×10−3
From 𝛽 = 𝑑
⇒𝜆= 𝐷
= 1
Where 𝑖𝑝 = Brewster’s angle

= 6 × 10−7 m = 6000Å ⇒ 𝑖𝑝 = tan−1 [𝑛]

93 (b) 97 (b)
3 Width of the central maximum,
𝑣 100 × 10
∆𝜆 = 𝜆 = 5700 × = 1.90Å 2𝐷𝜆
𝑐 3 × 108 β0 =
94 (b) a
When a thin glass plate of thickness t is placed 1
β0 ∝
over one of the slits, then lateral displacement is 𝑎
∴ To increase the width of the central maximum
given by
one should decrease 𝑎.

Page |6
99 (a) (6 + 1)𝐷
𝑥= ×𝜆
𝜆𝐷 2𝑎
β=
𝑑
⇒ β∝𝐷 Accordingly
β1 D1
⇒ = ∴ 5 × 6500 = 7 × 𝜆
β2 D2
β1 − β2 D1 − D2 5
⇒ = ⇒𝜆= × 6500 = 4642.8 Å
β2 D2 7
∆β β2 λ2
⇒ = = 105 (c)
∆D D2 d2
3 × 10−5 For a slit of width 𝑎, light of wavelength 𝜆, when
⇒ 𝜆2 = × 10−3 light falls on the slit, the diffraction patterns so
5 × 10−2
obtained as
= 6 × 10−7 m = 6000Å
100 (d)
For 𝑛th secondary maxima path difference
𝜆 3𝜆
𝑑 sin 𝜃 = (2𝑛 + 1) ⇒ 𝑎 sin 𝜃 =
2 2
101 (d)
𝜆 360°
ϕ= = = 60°
6 6
𝐼 = 𝐼0 cos2 𝜃
= 𝐼0 cos2 60°
3
= × 𝐼0
4
𝐼 3
= The first diffraction minimum occurs at the angles
𝐼0 4
102 (c) given by
Path difference = 2𝑑 sin 𝜃 𝜆
∴ For constructive interference sin θ =
𝑎
2𝑑 sin 𝜃 = 𝑛𝜆
𝑛𝜆 From the equation, it is clear that width of the
⇒ 𝜃 = sin−1 ( )
2𝑑 central diffraction maximum is inversely
proportional to the width of the slit. On
increasing the width size𝑎, the angle θ at which
the intensity first becomes zero decreases,
resulting in a narrower central band and if the slit
width is made smaller, the angle θ increases,
giving a wider central band.
103 (a)
At a point of maxima 106 (c)
𝐷
∴ 𝐼max = 4𝐼0 = 4 Wm−2 Distance of 𝑛𝑡ℎ maxima, 𝑥 = 𝑛𝜆 ∝𝜆
𝑑

∴ 𝐼0 = 1 Wm−2 As 𝜆𝑏 < 𝜆𝑔

104 (c) ∴ 𝑥𝑏𝑙𝑢𝑒 < 𝑥𝑔𝑟𝑒𝑒𝑛

(2𝑛 + 1)𝜆𝐷
𝑥= 107 (a)
2𝑎
𝐶 3 × 108
For red light 𝑥 =
(4+1)𝐷
× 6500 𝑣= ⇒ 𝑣1 = = 3 × 108 𝐻𝑧 = 300 𝑀𝐻𝑧
2𝑎 𝜆 1
3×108
and 𝑣2 = 10
= 3 × 107 𝐻𝑧 = 30𝑀𝐻𝑧
For unknown wavelength of light,
108 (d)

Page |7
 𝑎
We know, 𝜆𝑚 = 𝜇 and 𝜇 = tan θ perpendicular (𝑖𝑒, 𝜃 = 90°), then 𝐼 =
𝐼0 cos2 90° = 0. It means the intensity of
𝜆𝑎 transmitted light is minimum
∴ 𝜆𝑚 = = 𝜆𝑎 cot θ
tan θ On plotting a graph between 𝐼 and 𝜃 as given by
relation (i), we get the curve as shown in figure
109 (b)
113 (b)
Ultrasonic waves cannot be polarized.
The resultant intensity at any point P is
110 (d) ϕ
For 5th dark fringe, 𝑥1 = (2𝑛 − 1) 2 𝑑 =
𝜆𝐷 9𝜆𝐷 𝐼 = 4𝐼0 cos2 ( )
2𝑑 2

∴ 𝐼0 = 4𝐼0 cos2 ϕ/2

𝐷 7𝜆𝐷 ϕ 1
For 7th bright fringe, 𝑥2 = 𝑛𝜆 = Or cos 2 = 2
𝑑 𝑑

𝐷 ϕ 𝜋 2𝜋
𝑥2 − 𝑥1 = (𝜇 − 1)𝑡 ∴ = 𝑜𝑟 ϕ =
𝑑 2 3 3

𝜆𝐷 9 𝐷 If Δ𝑥 is the corresponding value of path difference

[7 − ] = (𝜇 − 1)𝑡 at P, then
𝑑 2 𝑑
2.5𝜆 2𝜋
𝑡= ϕ= (Δ𝑥)
(𝜇 − 1) 𝜆

111 (a)
Wavelength of matter wave or de Broglie wave 2𝜋 2𝜋
length = Δ𝑥.
3 𝜆
ℎ ℎ
𝜆= = As Δ𝑥 =
𝑥𝑑
𝑚𝑣 𝑝 𝐷
From the above relation it is clear that
1 1 𝑥𝑑
wavelength of matter wave is independent the ∴ =
charge 3 𝜆𝐷
112 (a) 𝜆 6×10−7
Or 𝑥 = 3𝑑/𝐷 = 3×10−4 = 2 × 10−3 m
According to law of Malus, when a beam of
completely plane polarized light is incident on an
𝑥 = 2mm
analyser, the resultant intensity of light (𝐼)
transmitted from the analyser varies directly as This is the difference of point P from central
the square of the cosine of the angle (𝜃) between maximum.
planes of transmission of analyser and polarizer
𝑖𝑒, 𝐼 ∝ cos2 𝜃 and 𝐼 = 𝐼0 cos2 𝜃 …(i) 114 (b)
The rings observed in reflected light are exactly
complementary to those seen in transmitted light.
Corresponding to every dark ring in reflected light
there is a bright ring in transmitted light. The ray
reflected at the upper surface of the air-film
suffers no phase change while the ray reflected
internally at the lower surface suffers a phase
Where 𝐼0 = intensity of the light from polarizer change of 𝜋.
From Eq. (i), we note that if the transmission axes
of polarizer and analyser are parallel (𝑖𝑒, 𝜃 = 115 (b)
0° or 180°), then 𝐼 = 𝐼0 . It means that intensity of (𝑎 + 𝑏)𝜆
𝛽=
transmitted light is maximum. When the 2𝑎(𝜇 − 1)𝛼
transmission axes of polarizer and analyser are Where 𝑎 = distance between source and biprism

Page |8
 = 0.3 𝑚 800
𝑏 = distance between biprism and screen = 0.7 𝑚 =√
2 × 3.14 × (4) × 8.85 × 10−12 × 3 × 108
2
𝛼 = Angle of prism = 1°, 𝜇 = 1.5, 𝜆 = 6000 ×
𝑉
10−10 𝑚 = 54.77
(0.3+0.7)×6×10−7 𝑚
Hence, 𝛽 = 𝜋 122 (b)
2×0.3(1.5−1)×(1°× )
180

= 1.14 × 10−4 𝑚 = 0.0114 𝑐𝑚 Average energy density of electric field is given by

116 (b) 1 1 𝐸0 2 1
𝑢𝑒 = 𝜀0 𝐸 2 = 𝜀0 ( ) = 𝜀0 𝐸02
When two sources are obtained from a single 2 2 √2 4
source, the wavefront is divided into two parts. 1
= × 8.85 × 10−12 (1)2 = 2.2 × 10−12 𝐽/𝑚 3
These two wavefronts act as if they are emanated 4
123 (c)
from two sources having a fixed phase
𝜆𝐷 500 × 10−10 × 1
relationship 𝛽= = 𝑚 = 5 × 10−3 𝑚
𝑑 0.1 × 10−3
117 (c)
= 0.5 𝑐𝑚
From Brewster’s law,
124 (a)
𝜇 = tan 𝑖𝑝 To form circularly polarized light
𝐸𝑥 = 𝐴 sin 𝜔𝑡
𝑐 𝐸𝑦 = 𝐴 cos 𝜔𝑡
⇒ = tan 60° = √3
𝑣 Resultant amplitude
8 2 𝜋
𝑐 3 × 10 |𝐸⃗ | = 𝐴2 + 𝐴2 + 2𝐴. 𝐴 cos ⇒ |𝐸⃗ | = 𝐴√2
⇒𝑣= = 2
√3 √3 = constant
108 m 125 (a)
= √3 × 𝜆.𝐷
s 𝛽 = 𝑑 where 𝐷 = distance of screen from wire,
𝑑 = diameter of wire
118 (d)
126 (b)
𝜆𝐷 600 × 10−9 × 2 −4
β= = = 12 × 10 m Angular dispersion of central maximum=angular
𝑑 1 × 10−3
dispersion of 1st minimum (= 2θ)
So, distance between the first dark fringes on
1𝜆 2×10−3 1
either side of the central bright fringe From sin θ = 𝑎 = 4×10−3 = 2

𝑋 = 2β θ = 30°

= 2 × 12 × 10−4 m ∴ 2θ = 2 × 30° = 60°

= 24 × 10−4 m = 2.4 mm 127 (b)

1 𝐼
𝐼′ = 𝐼 𝑒 −𝜇𝑥 ⇒ 𝑥 = 𝜇 log 𝑒 𝐼′ (where 𝐼 = original
119 (d)
Wave is 𝑢𝑣 rays intensity, 𝐼′ = changed intensity)
120 (a) 1 𝐼 3
36 = log 𝑒 = log 𝑒 2 … (i)
Oil floating on water looks coloured only when 𝜇 𝐼/8 𝜇
thickness of oil layer=wavelength of 1 𝐼 1
𝑥 = log 𝑒 = log 𝑒 2 … (ii)
light=10000Å 𝜇 𝐼/2 𝜇
From equation (i) and (ii), 𝑥 = 12𝑚𝑚
121 (d) 128 (b)
Intensity of EM wave is given by For a path difference (𝜇 − 1)𝑡, the shift is
𝑃 1
𝐼= 2
= 𝑣𝑎𝑣 . 𝑐 = 𝜀0 𝐸02 × 𝑐 D
4𝜋𝑅 2 x = (μ − 1)t
d
𝑃
⇒ 𝐸0 = √
2𝜋𝑅2 𝜀0 𝑐 129 (b)

Page |9
 𝜆𝐷 represented by𝑦 = constant.
From 𝛽 = 𝑑

136 (b)
(5000 × 10−10 ) × 1.0
5 × 10−3 = 𝐼𝐴 = 𝑅12
𝑑
𝑅2 2 3 2
5 × 10−7 𝐼𝐵 = (𝑅1 − 𝑅2 )2 = 𝑅12 (1 − 2
) = 𝑅1 (1 − )
𝑅1 4
𝑑= = 10−4 m = 0.1 mm
5 × 10−3 𝑅12
=
16
130 (b)
𝑅2 𝑅3 2
𝜆 = 6000 Å = 6 × 10−7 m 𝐼𝐶 = (𝑅1 − 𝑅2 + 𝑅3 )2 = 𝑅12 (1 − + )
𝑅1 𝑅1
Path difference for dark fringe ∆𝑥 = (2𝑛 + 1) 2
𝜆 𝑅2 𝑅3 𝑅2 2
= 𝑅12 (1 − + × )
𝑅1 𝑅2 𝑅1
For third dark fringe 𝑛 = 2 3 3 3 2 13 2 169 2
= 𝑅12 (1 − + × ) = ( ) 𝑅12 = 𝑅
4 4 4 16 256 1
6 × 10−7 𝑅12 169 2
∴ ∆𝑥 = (2 × 2 + 1) × ∴ 𝐼𝐴 : 𝐼𝐵 : 𝐼𝐶 = 𝑅12 : : 𝑅 = 256: 16: 169
2 16 256 1
138 (d)
5 × 6 × 10−7
= Let 𝜆 be wavelength of monochromatic light, used
2
to illuminate the slit S, and d be the distance
= 15 × 10−7 between coherent sources, then width of slits is
given by
= 1.5 × 10−6 m = 1.5𝜇
𝐷𝜆
131 (a) 𝑊=
𝑑
Using Malus law, 𝐼 = 𝐼0 cos2 𝜃
As here polarizer is rotating, 𝑖. 𝑒., all the values of When D is distance between screen and source.
𝜃 are possible
1 2𝜋 1 2𝜋
𝐼𝑎𝑣 = ∫ 𝐼 𝑑𝜃 = ∫ 𝐼 cos2 𝜃 𝑑𝜃
2𝜋 0 2𝜋 0 0
𝐼0
On integration we get 𝐼𝑎𝑣 = 2
Energy 𝑝 10−3 10 𝑊𝑎𝑡𝑡
Where 𝐼0 = Area×Time = 𝐴 = 3×10−4 = 3 𝑚2
1 10 5
∴ 𝐼𝑎𝑣 = × = 𝑊𝑎𝑡𝑡
2 3 3
2𝜋 2×3.14 1
and Time period 𝑇 = 𝜔 = 31.4 = 5 𝑠 Given, 𝑑 = 3 mm, 𝜆 = 5000 Å = 5 × 10−7 m
∴ Energy of light passing through the polarizer
5
= 5 × 10−4 mm
−4
per revolution = 𝐼𝑎𝑣 × Area × 𝑇 = 3 × 3 × 10 ×
1 𝐷 = 90 cm = 900 mm
5
= 10−4 𝐽
132 (c) 5 × 10−4 × 900
∴𝑊=
For 2𝜋 phase difference → Path difference is 𝜆 3
𝜆
∴ For 𝜙 phase difference → Path difference is 2𝜋 × = 15 × 10−2 mm = 0.15 mm
𝜙
133 (c) 139 (a)
Photoelectric effect does not support the wave The direction of EM wave is given by the direction
theory of light. of 𝐸⃗ × 𝐵 ⃗
134 (a) 140 (b)
As velocity of light is perpendicular to the If 𝐼0 is intensity of unpolarized light, then
wavefront, and light is travelling in vacuum along intensity of polarized light from 1st Polaroid=𝐼0 /
the𝑦 − axis, therefore, the wavefront is 2.

P a g e | 10
 On rotating through 45°, intensity of light from (2𝑛 − 1)𝜆𝐷
𝑥𝑛 =
2nd Polaroid, 2𝑑
(2 × 2 − 1)𝜆𝐷 3𝜆𝐷
∴ 𝑥2 = =
𝐼0 2
𝐼0 1 2 𝐼0 2𝑑 2𝑑
𝐼 = ( ) (cos 45°) = ( ) = 3𝜆 × 1
2 2 √2 4 ⇒ 1 × 10−3 =
2 × 0.9 × 10−3
= 25% 𝐼0 −5
⇒ 𝜆 = 6 × 10 cm
148 (c)
141 (a) Polarization is not shown by sound waves
According to Doppler’s effect, wherever there is a 149 (a)
relative motion between source and observer, the 𝜆𝐷
frequency observed is different from that given 𝛽=
𝑑
out by source 150 (a)
142 (b) ∆𝜆 𝑣 (401.8 − 393.3) 𝑣
𝜆𝐷 = ⇒ =
𝛽= 𝜆 𝑐 393.3 3 × 108
𝑑 6
⇒ 𝑣 = 6.48 × 10 𝑚/𝑠 = 6480𝑘𝑚/𝑠
143 (a) 151 (a)
Distance between two consecutive 1
𝜆𝐷 6000×10−10 ×1 𝐼 = 𝜀0 𝐶𝐸02
Dark fringes = = 2
𝑑 0.6×10−3
−3 2𝐼 2 × 5 × 10−16
= 1 × 10 𝑚 = 1𝑚𝑚
⇒ 𝐸0 = √ =√
144 (c) 𝜀0 𝑐 8.85 × 10−12 × 3 × 108
(2𝑛 + 1)𝜆𝐷 𝑉
𝑥= = 0.61 × 10−6
2𝑎 𝑚
(4+1)𝐷
For red light, 𝑥 = × 6500Å 𝑉0
2𝑎 Also 𝐸0 = 𝑑
⇒ 𝑉0 = 𝐸0 𝑑 = 0.61 × 10−6 × 2 =
(6+1)𝐷
For other light, 𝑥 = 2𝑎
× 𝜆Å 1.23𝜇𝑉
𝑋 is same for each 152 (c)
5 Distance of 5th bright fringe from central fringe,
∴ 5 × 6500 = 7 × 𝜆 ⇒ 𝜆 = × 6500 = 4642.8Å 5𝜆𝐷
7 𝑋5𝐵 = …(i)
𝑑
146 (d)
Distance of 3rd dark fringe from central fringe,
Given, spacing between second dark fringe and (2 × 3 − 1)𝜆𝐷 5 𝜆𝐷
central fringe 𝑋3𝐷 = = … (ii)
2𝑑 2 𝑑
𝛽 From (i) and (ii) required distance
=𝛽+ 5 𝜆𝐷 5 5 × 10−7 × 1
2 𝑋5𝐵 − 𝑋3𝐷 = (5 − ) = ×
2 𝑑 2 1 × 10−3
3𝛽
Or = 1 mm = 1.25 𝑚𝑚
2
2 153 (b)
or 𝛽 = 3 × 1 mm 1
𝑑 = 0.1 mm = 10−4 , D = 20 cm = m
5
𝜆𝐷 2
= mm
𝑑 3 𝜆 = 5460Å = 5.46 × 10−7 m
2 0.9 × 10−3 Angular position of first dark fringe is
∴ 𝜆= × 10−3 ×
3 𝟏
𝑥 𝜆 5.46 × 10−7
∴ 𝜆 = 0.6 × 10−6 m θ= = =
𝐷 2𝑑 2 × 10−4
∴ 𝜆 = 600 × 10−9 m = 2.73 × 10−3 rad
= 600 m 180°
= 2.73 × 10−3 × = 0.156°
𝜋
147 (d)
Distance of 𝑛th dark fringe from central fringe 154 (a)
Distance covered by T.V. signals = √2ℎ𝑅
P a g e | 11
 𝜆𝐷
⇒ maximum distance ∝ ℎ1/2 Now, 𝑥1 − 𝑥2 = 2𝑑
155 (b)
2𝜋
By using phase difference 𝜙 = (Δ) If B is the band width, then
𝜆
For path difference 𝜆, phase difference 𝜙1 = 2𝜋 𝐵
and for path difference 𝜆/4, phase difference 𝜙2 = 𝑥1 − 𝑥2 =
2
𝜋/2
𝜙 𝐼 158 (c)
cos2 (𝜙 /2)
Also by using 𝐼 = 4𝐼0 cos2 2 ⇒ 𝐼1 = cos2 (𝜙1/2)
2 2 Transverse waves can be polarized only
𝐾 cos2 (2𝜋/2) 1 𝐾 159 (d)
⇒ = 𝜋/2
= ⇒ 𝐼2 =
𝐼2 2
cos ( 2 ) 1/2 2 When white light is used instead of
156 (c) monochromatic light, the central bright fringe
Let S be a slit illuminated by monochromatic light becomes white, while others are coloured. Hence,
of wavelength(𝜆), let 𝑆1 , 𝑆2 be coherent sources distinction is made.
and distance between them be d and distance 160 (d)
between source and screen is D. then, fringe Δ𝜆 𝑣 0.5 Δ𝜆 0.5
= 𝑐 , Now Δ𝜆 = 100 𝜆 ⇒ 𝜆 = 100
width (W) is given by 𝜆
0.5 0.5
∴𝑣= ×𝑐 = × 3 × 108 = 1.5 × 106 𝑚/𝑠
100 100
Increase in 𝜆 indicates that the star is receding
161 (b)
(𝑎 + 𝑏)𝜆 𝜆
𝛽= , 𝑖. 𝑒. , 𝛽 ∝
2𝑎(𝜇 − 1)𝛼 (𝜇 − 1)
𝜆
𝜇′
When placed in water 𝛽′ ∝ 𝜇
( ′ −1)
𝜇
𝜆
𝑖. 𝑒. , 𝛽′ ∝ but < 𝜇
(𝜇−𝜇′)
𝛽′ (𝜇 − 1)
𝐷𝜆 ∴ = ∵ 𝜇′ > 1𝜆 ∴ 𝛽′ > 𝛽
𝑊= 𝛽 (𝜇 − 𝜇′)
𝑑
𝑖. 𝑒., the fringe width increases
𝑑
When, 𝑑2 = 2 , 𝐷2 = 2𝐷 162 (c)
In 1903, the American scientists Nicols and Hull
(2𝐷)𝜆 𝐷𝜆 measured the radiation pressure of visible light. It
∴ 𝑊2 = =4 = 4𝑊 was found to be of the order of 7 × 10−6 𝑁/𝑚 2
𝑑/2 𝑑
163 (c)
The fringe width is quadrupled. Limit of resolution of the telescope

157 (c) 1.22𝜆 𝑑

𝑛𝜆𝐷 𝑎= =
Position of nth bright fringe 𝑥1 = 𝑎 𝑥
𝑑
1.22𝜆 𝑥
For first bright fringe 𝑛 = 1 Or 𝑑 = 𝑎

𝜆𝐷 1.22 × 5 × 10−7 × 8 × 1016

∴ 𝑥1 = = = 1.95 × 1011 m
𝑑 0.25
(2𝑛−1)𝜆𝐷
Position of nth dark fringe 𝑥2 = 164 (d)
2𝑑
Let 𝐴1 = 𝐴0 , Then 𝐴2 = 2𝐴0
For first dark fringe 𝑛 = 1 Intensity 𝐼 ∝ 𝐴2
Hence 𝐼1 = 𝐼0 , 𝐼2 = 4𝐼0
𝜆𝐷
∴ 𝑥2 = We have 𝐼 = 𝐼0 + 4𝐼0 + 2√𝐼0 × 4𝐼0 cos 𝜙
2𝑑
For 𝐼max , cos 𝜙 = 1
𝐼𝑚
Hence 𝐼𝑚 = 9𝐼0 or 𝐼0 =
9

P a g e | 12
 When phase difference is 𝜙 then 𝑎 = 1 mm = 10−3 m, 𝐷 = 2 m

𝐼 = 𝐼0 + 4𝐼0 + 2√4𝐼02 cos 𝜙 Distance between the first dark fringes on either
= 𝐼0 + 4𝐼0 (1 + cos 𝜙) side of central bright fringe=width of central
𝜙 𝜙 maximum
= 𝐼0 (1 + 8 cos2 ) [∵ 1 + cos 𝜙 = 2 cos2 ]
2 2
𝐼𝑚 2𝜆𝐷 2 × 6 × 10−7 × 2
= (1 + 8 cos2 𝜙/2) = =
9 𝑎 10−3
166 (a) = 24 × 10−4 m = 2.4 mm
𝐷
From 𝑥 = 𝑛𝜆
𝑑
175 (a)
𝐷 For second dark fringe 𝑑 sin 𝜃 = 2𝜆
𝑑1 = 7𝜆1
𝑑 ⇒ 24 × 10−5 × 10−2 × sin 30 = 2𝜆
𝐷 ⇒ 𝜆 = 6 × 10−7 𝑚 = 6000 Å
𝑑2 = 7𝜆2 177 (d)
𝑑
Given single slit of width 𝑑 = 0.1 mm
𝑑1 𝜆1 𝑑 = 0.1 × 10−3 m
∴ =
𝑑 2 𝜆2 Or 𝑑 = 1 × 10−4 m
Light of wavelength 𝑎 = 600 Å
167 (d)
1.22𝜆 Or 𝛼 = 6 × 10−7 m
Angular resolution = 𝑑 The angle of diffraction
𝑛𝜆
1.22 × 5000 × 10−10 θ=
= = 6.1 × 10−6 𝑑
10 × 10−2 2 × 6 × 10−7
θ=
≈ 10−6 rad 1 × 10−4
θ = 12 × 10−3
168 (d) θ = 0.012 rad
For destructive interference path difference is 178 (a)
𝜆 𝜆
odd multiple of 2 𝜃 = 𝑑 ; 𝜃 can be increased by increasing 𝜆, so here
169 (c) 𝜆 has to be increased by 10%
10
Momentum of the electron will increase. So the 𝑖. 𝑒. , % Increase = 100 × 5890 = 589Å
wavelength (𝜆 = ℎ/𝑝) of electrons will decrease
179 (b)
and fringe width decreases as 𝛽 ∝ 𝜆 Diffraction is obtained when the slit width is of
170 (b) the order of wavelength of EM waves (or light).
𝜆
Angular fringe width 𝜃 = 𝑑 ⇒ 𝜃 ∝ 𝜆 Here wavelength of 𝑋-rays (1 − 100Å) is very-
𝜆𝑎 very lesser than slit width (0.6 𝑚𝑚). Therefore no
𝜆𝑤 =
𝜇𝑤 diffraction pattern will be observed
So 𝜃𝑤 =
𝜃air
=
0.20
4 = 0.15° 180 (d)
𝜇𝑤
3 Distance between successive fringes-fringe width
172 (a)
If one of slits is closed then interference fringes 𝜆𝐷 8×10−5×2
=𝛽= 𝑑
= 0.05
= 0.32 cm
are not formed on the screen but a fringe pattern
is observed due to diffraction from slit 181 (d)
173 (b) 𝜇𝑚 = tan 𝜃𝑝 ⇒ 𝜃𝑝 = tan−1 𝑛
(𝜇−1)𝑡.𝐷
Shift in the fringe pattern 𝑥 = 𝑑
182 (b)
(1.5 − 1) × 2.5 × 10−5 × 100 × 10−2 Angle between 𝑃1 and 𝑃2 = 30° [Given]
= = 2.5 𝑐𝑚 Angle between 𝑃2 and 𝑃3 = 𝜃 = 90° − 30° = 60°
0.5 × 10−3
174 (d)
𝜆 = 600 nm = 6 × 10−7 m

P a g e | 13
 So, 𝐼max = 𝐼 + 4𝐼 + 2√𝐼. 4𝐼 = 9𝐼

P1 P2 P3 188 (b)
𝐼max 4 (𝑎1 + 𝑎2 )2
=
𝐼min 1 (𝑎1 − 𝑎2 )2
W I1 I2 I3
I0  32 2 𝑎1 + 𝑎2 2
m Or =
𝑎1 − 𝑎2 1
30°

Or 𝑎1 + 𝑎2 = 2𝑎1 − 2𝑎2
The intensity of light transmitted by 𝑃1 is Or 𝑎1 = 3𝑎2
𝐼0 32 𝑊
𝐼1 = = = 16 2
2 2 𝑚 𝐼1 𝑎12 (3𝑎2 )2 9
According to Malus law the intensity of light ∴ = = =
𝐼2 𝑎22 𝑎22 1
transmitted
2 𝑎1 3
√3 𝑊
by 𝑃2 is 𝐼2 = 𝐼1 cos2 30° = 16 ( 2 ) = 12 𝑚2 ∴ =
𝑎2 1
Similarly intensity of light transmitted by 𝑃3 is
1 2 𝑊 190 (c)
𝐼3 = 𝐼2 cos2 𝜃 = 12 cos2 60° = 12 ( ) = 3 2 As velocity (or momentum) of electron is
2 𝑚
183 (b) ℎ
increased, the wavelength (𝜆 = 𝑝) will decrease.
As 𝑆3 , ∆𝑥 = 𝑆1 𝑆3 − 𝑆2 𝑆3 = 0
Hence, fringe width will decrease (𝜔 ∝ 𝜆)
2π
∴ ϕ= ∆𝑥 = 0 191 (b)
λ
Let 𝐼0 is intensity of light emitted from the source,
∴ 𝐼3 = 𝐼0 + 𝐼0 + 2√𝐼0 × 𝐼0 (cos 0°) then
Resultant intensity
∴ 𝐼3 = 4𝐼0 𝜙
𝐼 = 4𝐼0 cos2
2
The path difference at 𝑆4 is 𝜙
𝐼1 = 4𝐼0 cos2 = 4𝐼0
𝑥𝑑 𝜆𝐷 2
𝜆
∆𝑥 ′ = 𝑆1 𝑆4 − 𝑆2 𝑆4 = (here, 𝑥 = ) Now, ∆𝑥 = 4
𝐷 2𝑑
2𝜋 2𝜋 𝜆
𝑑 𝜆𝐷 𝜆 ϕ= × ∆𝑥 = ×
= × = 𝜆 𝜆 4
𝐷 2𝑑 2 𝜋
ϕ=
2
2π λ 𝜋
∴ ϕ′ = =π And 𝐼2 = 4𝐼0 cos2 4 = 2𝐼0
λ 2
𝐼1 : 𝐼2 = 2 ∶ 1
∴ 𝐼4 = 𝐼0 + 𝐼0 + 2𝐼0 cos 𝜋 = 0
192 (c)
𝐼3 4𝐼0 Interference is explained by wave nature of light
∴ = =∞
𝐼4 0 194 (c)
In Young’s double slit experiment, if white light is
184 (a)
used in place of monochromatic light, then the
Photoelectric effect and Compton effect cannot be
central fringe is white and some coloured fringes
explained on the basis of wave nature of light
around the central fringe are formed
while polarization and optical activity can be
explained.
185 (a)
λ 1
Angular spread on either side is θ = 𝑎 = 5 rad

186 (b)
𝐼max = 𝐼1 + 𝐼2 + 2√𝐼1 𝐼2
P a g e | 14
 200 (c)
Phase difference,
2𝜋
∆ϕ = ∆𝑥
𝜆
In a constructive interference,
∆ϕ = 2𝑛𝜋
Where 𝑛 = 0, 1, 2, 3, … …
2𝜋
∴ 2𝑛𝜋 = ∆𝑥
𝜆
Or ∆𝑥 = 𝑛𝜆
201 (b)
Since 𝛽𝑟𝑒𝑑 > 𝛽𝑣𝑖𝑜𝑙𝑒𝑡 etc., the bright fringe of violet 𝑃𝑅 = 𝑑
colour forms first and that of the red forms later
It may be noted that, the inner edge of the dark 𝑃𝑂 = 𝑑 sec θ
fringe is red, while the outer edge is violet.
And 𝐶𝑂 = 𝑃𝑂 cot 2𝜃 = 𝑑 sec θ cos 2θ
Similarly, the inner edge of the bright fringe is
violet and the outer edge is red Path difference between the two rays is,
195 (b)
Position of 3𝑟𝑑 bright fringe 𝑥 =
3𝐷𝜆 ∆𝑥 = 𝐶𝑂 + 𝑃𝑂
3 𝑑
𝑥3 𝑑 (0.9 × 10 ) × (0.28 × 10−3 )
−2
= (𝑑 sec θ + 𝑑 sec θ cos 2θ)
⇒𝜆= =
3𝐷 3 × 1.4
= 6000Å Phase difference between the two rays is
196 (a)
∆ϕ = 𝜋 (one is reflected, while another is direct)
For constructive interference
Path difference ∆ = 𝑑 sin θ = 𝑛𝜆 Therefore condition for constructive interference
𝑛𝜆 should be
⇒ 𝜃 = sin−1 [ ]
𝑑
198 (b)
The data which represents the music is stored on
the compact disc in the form of very small pits
arranged in a tightly wound spiral track in silvery
surface. The distance between two neighbouring
track is 1.6 micrometre. Which is only several
times the wavelength of visible light, this small
spacing is responsible for the wonderful colours
reflected by a CD which works as a diffraction
𝜆 3𝜆
grating. Hence, diffraction is responsible for Δ𝑥 = , ….
coloured bands. 2 2
𝜆
199 (a) Or 𝑑 sec θ (1 + cos 2θ) =
2
As we know 𝑑 𝜆
𝐷 Or (cos θ) (2 cos2 θ) = 2
β= 𝜆
𝑑
1 𝜆
λ∝ Or cos θ = 4𝑑
μ
From Eqs. (i) and (ii), 202 (a)
1 𝐷𝜆 𝛽 𝐷 𝜆 𝑑
β∝λ∝ As 𝛽 = 𝑑
⇒ 𝛽1 = (𝐷1) (𝜆1 ) (𝑑2 )
μ 2 2 2 1

1 𝐷1 1 1 𝐷1 4
β∝ ⇒1 =( )×( )×( )⇒ =
μ 𝐷2 2 2 𝐷2 1
The refractive index of water is greater than air, 203 (c)
therefore fringe width will decrease.
P a g e | 15
 Angular momentum Energy is conserved in the interference of light
213 (c)
𝑛ℎ
𝐿= Distance between two adjacent bright (or dark)
2𝜋 fringes is called the fringe width. It is denoted by
𝑈 = 𝑛ℎ𝑣 𝛽, thus

𝜔 𝐷𝜆
𝜔 = 2𝜋𝑣 ⇒ 𝑣 = 𝛽=
2𝜋 𝑑
𝑛ℎ𝜔 Where D is the distance between slit source and
∴ 𝑈=
2𝜋 screen and d is separation of slits.

Or 𝑈 = 𝐿𝜔 Since, D and d are increased to same extent, so

fringe width (𝑤) will remain unchanged.
𝑈
𝐿=
𝜔 214 (b)
204 (b) As field of view is same in both cases
In an interference experiment the spacing 𝑛1 𝛽1 = 𝑛2 𝛽2
between successive maxima and minima is called
the fringe width and is given by 𝐷𝜆1 𝐷𝜆2
Or 𝑛1 ( ) = 𝑛2 ( )
𝑑 𝑑
β = 𝐷𝜆/𝑑
205 (d) 𝑛
Or 𝜆2 = (𝑛1 ) 𝜆1
The amplitude will be 𝐴 cos 60° = 𝐴/2 2

206 (c) 84
𝜆 ∴ 𝜆2 = ( ) × 4358
𝛽∝ 62
𝑑
207 (c) 𝜆2 = 5904 Å
Suppose slit width’s are equal, so they produces
waves of equal intensity say 𝐼′. Resultant intensity 215 (b)
at any point 𝐼𝑅 = 4𝐼′ cos2 𝜙 where 𝜙 is the phase Maxwell first proved it mathematically that light
difference between the waves at the point of waves are transverse in nature.
observation 216 (c)
For maximum intensity 𝜙 = 0° ⇒ 𝐼max = 4𝐼′ = 𝐼 𝜆
sin 𝜃 =
…(i) 𝑑
If one of slit is closed. Resultant intensity at the 589 × 10−9 1
= −3
= 10−3 = = 0.001
samepoint will be 𝐼′ only, 𝑖. 𝑒. , 𝐼′ = 𝐼𝑂 …(ii) 0.589 × 10 1000
217 (b)
Comparing equations (i) and (ii) we get
Electron diffraction is the diffraction of a beam of
𝐼 = 4𝐼𝑂
electrons by atoms or molecules. The fact that
208 (d)
electrons can be diffracted in a similar way to
Origin of spectra is not explained by Huygen’s
light shows the particles can act as waves.
theory
209 (c) 219 (a)
Wave theory of light is given by Huygen If unpolarised light is incident at polarising angle,
210 (a) then reflected light is completely, ie, 100%
In the normal adjustment of Young’s double slit polarized.
experiment, path difference between the waves at
central location is always zero, so maxima is 220 (a)
1 1
obtained at central position 𝛽 ∝ 𝑑 ⇒ If 𝑑 becomes thrice, then 𝛽 becomes 3
211 (c) times
1
Speed of EM waves in vacuum = = constant 221 (b)
√𝜇0𝜀0
212 (b) At the centre, all colours meet in phase, hence

P a g e | 16
 central fringe is white. ∆𝜆
𝑊=
𝑑
222 (b)
In this case, we can assume that both the source If the screen is placed at a constant distance from
and the observer are moving towards each other the source, then
with speed 𝜆
𝑐−𝑢 𝑐−(−𝑣) 𝑐+𝑣 𝑊∝
𝑣. Hence 𝑣 ′ = 𝑐−𝑢𝑜 = 𝑐−𝑣
𝑣 = 𝑐−𝑣 𝑣 𝑑
𝑠
(𝑐 + 𝑣)(𝑐 − 𝑣) 𝑐2 − 𝑣2
= 𝑣 = 𝑣 Hence, fringe width can be changed either by
(𝑐 − 𝑣 ) 2 𝑐 2 + 𝑣 2 − 2𝑣𝑐 changing the wavelength of light or by changing
𝑐2 𝑐
Since 𝑣 << 𝑐, therefore 𝑣 ′ = = 𝑣 the separation between the two slits.
𝑐 2 −2𝑣𝑐 𝑐−2𝑣
224 (a)
231 (a)
Phenomenon of interference of light takes place
Position of 𝑛th bright fringe from central maxima
225 (d) 𝑛 𝜆𝐷
When a thin sheet of polyvinyl alcohol is stretched 𝑥𝑛1 = 1 here 𝑛1 = 5
𝑑
and then impregnating with iodine, H-polaroid is 5𝜆𝐷
∴ 𝑥𝑛1 =
obtained. 𝑑
Position of n th dark fringe from central maxima
226 (d) 𝑥𝑛 =
(2𝑛−1)𝜆𝐷
, here 𝑛 = 3
𝐷 2𝑑
𝛽= 𝜆 5 𝜆𝐷
𝑑 𝑥𝑛 =
2 𝑑
∆𝐷 2.5𝜆𝐷
∆𝛽 = 𝜆 𝑥𝑛1 − 𝑥𝑛 = = 2.5 β
𝑑 𝑑
Given β = 0.4 mm
𝑑Δ𝛽
Δ𝐷 = ⇒ 𝑥𝑛1 − 𝑥𝑛 = 1 mm
𝜆 232 (b)
10−3 × 3 × 10−5 Audible waves are not electromagnetic wave
= 233 (a)
600 × 10−9
Plane containing the direction of vibration and
= 5 cmaway or towards the slits wave motion is called plane of polarization. Plane
of vibration is perpendicular to the direction of
227 (c)
propagation and also perpendicular to the plane
For constructive interference path difference is
𝜆 of polarization. Therefore, angle between plane of
even multiple of polarization and direction of propagation is 0°.
2
228 (b)
Here path difference at a point 𝑃 on the circle is 234 (d)
𝑟2
given by By using 𝑓𝑝 = (2𝑝−1)𝜆
P
For first 𝐻𝑃𝑍 𝑟 = √𝑓𝑝 𝜆 = √0.6 × 6000 × 10−10
 = 6 × 10−4 𝑚
S1 d S2 235 (d)
The angular position of first diffraction minimum
is
Δ𝑥 = 𝑑 cos 𝜃 …(i)
For maxima at 𝑃 𝜆
Δ𝑥 = 𝑛𝜆 …(ii) sin θ =
𝑎
From equation (i) and (ii)
𝑛𝜆 4𝜆 The phase difference
𝑛𝜆 = 𝑑 cos 𝜃 ⇒ 𝜃 = cos −1 ( ) = cos−1 ( )
𝑑 𝑑 2𝜋
230 (c) ϕ= × Δ𝑥
𝜆
Fringe width

P a g e | 17
 2𝜋 closer)
ϕ= ×𝜆
𝜆 245 (d)
A grating which would be most suitable for
ϕ = 2𝜋
construction a spectrometer for the visible and
236 (b) ultraviolet region should have 1000000 lines
𝐴
𝐴 = 𝑛𝜋𝑑𝜆 ⇒ 𝑛𝑑 = 𝜋𝜆 = constant cm−1 .
1
⇒ 𝑛 ∝ (𝑛 = number of blocked 𝐻𝑃𝑍) on 246 (c)
𝑑
decreasing 𝑑, 𝑛 increases, hence intensity 𝛽∝𝜆
decreases 247 (b)
238 (b) The intensity at a point on screen is given by
All components of electromagnetic spectrum 𝐼 = 4𝐼0 cos2 (𝜙/2)
travel in vacuum with velocity 3 × 108 𝑚/𝑠 Where 𝜙 is the phase difference. In this problem
239 (b) 𝜙 arises (i) due to initial phase difference of 𝜋/4
𝐷𝜆 1 × 5 × 10−7 and (ii) due to path difference for the observation
𝑑= = = 10−4 𝑚 = 0.1 𝑚𝑚 point situated at 𝜃 = 30°. Thus
𝛽 5 × 10−3
𝜋 2𝜋 𝜋 2𝜋 𝜆
240 (a) 𝜙= + (𝑑 sin 𝜃) = + . (sin 30°)
𝑣 4 𝜆 4 𝜆 4
∆𝜆 = 𝜆 𝑐 and 𝑣 = 𝑟𝜔 𝜋 𝜋 𝜋
2𝜋 = + =
4 4 2
𝑣 = 7 × 108 × , 𝑐 = 3 × 108 𝑚/𝑠 𝜙 𝜋
25 × 24 × 3600 Thus 2 = 4 and 𝐼 = 4𝐼0 cos2 (𝜋/4) = 2𝐼0
∴ ∆𝜆 = 0.04Å
248 (b)
241 (d)
Amplitude of electric field and magnetic field are
𝜆𝐷
From 𝛽 = , related by the relation
𝑑
𝐸0
𝛽. 𝑑 0.3 × 10−2 × 2 × 10−3 =𝑐
𝜆= = = 6 × 10−7 m 𝐵0
𝐷 1 Average energy density of the magnetic field is
= 6000 Å 1 𝐵02
𝑣𝐵 =
242 (c) 4 𝜇0
Here 𝐴2 = 𝑎12 + 𝑎22 + 2𝑎1 𝑎2 cos 𝛿 1 𝐸02 𝐸0
= 2
[∵ 𝐵0 = ]
∵ 𝑎1 = 𝑎2 = 𝑎 4 𝜇0 𝑐 𝑐
𝛿 1 1
∴ 𝐴2 = 2𝑎2 (1 + cos 𝛿 ) = 2𝑎2 (1 + 2 cos2 − 1) = 𝜀0 𝐸02 [∵ 𝑐 = ]
2 4 √𝜇0 𝜀0
𝛿 1
⇒ 𝐴2 ∝ cos2 = × 8.854 × 10−12 × (2)2
2 4
𝛿
Now, 𝐼 ∝ 𝐴 ∴ 𝐼 ∝ 𝐴2 ∝ cos2 2
2 = 8.854 × 10−12 𝐽𝑚 −3
𝛿 = 8.86 × 10−12 𝐽𝑚 −3
∴ 𝐼 ∝ cos2 249 (b)
2
243 (d) Here, wavelength, 𝜆 = 625𝑛𝑚 = 625 × 10−9 𝑚
The rays of light from two coherent sources Number of lines per meter, 𝑁 = 2 × 105
sin 𝜃
superimpose each other on the screen forming For principal maxima is grating spectra = 𝑛𝜆,
𝑁
alternate maxima (with maximum intensity 𝐼0 ) Where 𝑛(= 1,2,3) is the order of principal
and minima (with intensity zero). If two non- maxima and 𝜃 is the angle of diffraction
coherent sources superimpose, there will be no The maximum value of sin 𝜃 is 1
maxima and minima, instead the intensity will be 1 1
𝐼0
throughout. ∴𝑛= = =8
2 𝑁𝜆 2 × 10 × 625 × 10−9
5

∴ Number of maxima = 2𝑛 + 1 = 2 × 8 + 1 = 17
244 (b) 250 (c)
∆𝜆 𝑣 0.05 𝑣 Distance between two successive maxima
= ⇒ = ⇒ 𝑣 = 1.5 × 105 𝑚/𝑠
𝜆 𝑐 100 3 × 108
(Since wavelength is decreasing, so star is coming
P a g e | 18
 0.14 sin(
60°+𝛿𝑚
)
𝜆= m = 10−2 m, Or 1.414 = 2
14 60°
sin( )
2

𝑐 3 × 108 1.414 ×1 60°+𝛿𝑚

𝑣= = = 3 × 1010 H Or = sin ( ) [∵ 1.414 = √2]
𝜆 10−2 2 2

251 (c) Or
√2
= sin (
60°+𝛿𝑚
)
2 2
Width of the diffraction band is given by
1 60°+𝛿𝑚
λD Or = sin ( 2
)
√2
β=
d
60°+𝛿𝑚
Or 45° = ( )
Where D= distance between slit and the screen 2

𝜆 = wavelength of light used and Or 𝛿 = 30°

d = width of slit. 254 (b)

𝐼 = 𝐼1 + 𝐼2 + 2√𝐼1 𝐼2 cos 0°
Hence, width of the diffraction band varies = 4 + 9 + 2√4 × 9
directly as the distance between the slit and the = 25 units
screen. 255 (c)
252 (b) The intensity of illumination is given by
𝑃 cos 𝜃
Here, 𝑖𝑝 = 𝑟 + 𝛿 𝐼=
𝑟2
Where 𝑃 = power of the source
𝑟 = distance between source and point
𝜃 = angle of incidence
When 𝜃 = 0, 𝐼 will be maximum. Hence, the rays
from the sun are incident normally on the earth
surface
256 (c)
2 2
𝑖𝑝 = 𝑟 + 𝐼 9
𝐼max √𝐼1 + 1 √ +1 4
2 1
24 … (i) = = =
𝐼min 𝐼 9 1
√𝐼1 − 1 √ −1
Moreover, 𝑖𝑝 + 𝑟 = 90° … (ii) ( 2 ) ( 1 )
257 (c)
From Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get Two coherent source must have a constant phase
difference otherwise they can not produce
𝑖𝑝 + (𝑖𝑝 − 24) = 90° interference
258 (c)
⇒ 𝑖𝑝 = 57°
When white light is used in a biprism experiment,
253 (d) central spot will be white, while the surronding
By Brewster’s law, 𝜇 = tan θ𝑝 fringes will be colored.

Or 𝜇 = tan 54.74° 259 (d)

𝑅22
𝐼= 4
given 𝑛1 𝑏1 = 𝑛2 𝑏2 ⇒ 1 × 200 = 𝑛2 × 25
Or 𝜇 = 1.414
∴ 𝑛2 = 8 𝐻𝑃𝑍
For an equilateral prism, ∠𝐴 = 60° 𝑅9 2
∴𝐼=( )
2
𝐴+𝛿𝑚
sin ( 2
) 𝑅9 𝑅8 𝑅7 𝑅6 𝑅5 𝑅4 𝑅3 𝑅2 2
∴ 𝜇= =( × × × × × × × )
𝐴
sin ( 2 ) 𝑅8 𝑅7 𝑅6 𝑅5 𝑅4 𝑅3 𝑅2 𝑅2
𝑅9 2
=( ) 𝐼
𝑅2
P a g e | 19
260 (a) 5
tan 𝑖 =
Distance between the slits, 3
5
𝑑 = √𝑑1 𝑑2 = √4.05 × 10−3 × 2.90 × 10−3 𝑖 = tan−1 ( )
3
= 3.427 × 10−3 m 273 (b)
261 (a) Given, 𝑑 = 0.28 mm = 0.28 × 10−3 m,
To be invisible in vacuum 𝜇 of medium must be 𝐷 = 1.4 m,
equal to 𝜇 of vacuum, which is 1. β = 0.9 cm = 0.9 × 10−2 m
𝐷𝜆
β=3
263 (b) 𝑑
𝛽𝑑
Wavelength of visible spectrum is 3900Å − 7800Å Or 𝜆 = 3𝐷
265 (a) 0.9 × 10 −2 × 0.28 × 10−3
8 Or 𝜆 =
𝑐 3 × 10 3×1.4
𝜆= = 6
= 36.5𝑚 Or𝜆 = 6 × 10 −7
m = 6000 Å
𝑣 8.2 × 10
266 (d) 274 (a)
When two waves of same frenquency, same The condition for constructive interference in a
wavelength and same velocity moves in the same thin film of thickness 𝑡 and refractive index 𝜇 in
direction. Their superposition results in the the reflected system, for normal incidence is
interference. The two beams should be 1
2𝜇𝑡 = (𝑛 + ) 𝜆, where 𝑛 = 0, 1, 2, 3
monochromatic. 2
267 (c) For minimum thickness, 𝑛 = 0
𝜆𝐷 1 𝜆 𝜆 600 × 10−9
𝛽 ≠ 𝑑 and 𝜆 ∝ 𝜇 ∴ 2𝜇𝑡 = ⇒ 𝑡 = = = 100𝑛𝑚
2 4𝜇 4 × 1.5
268 (d) 275 (c)
𝐼 2
𝜙 2𝜋 Position of fourth maxima
= cos ( ) ; 𝜙 = . Δ𝑥
𝐼0 2 𝜆 4𝐷𝜆
269 (a) 𝑥0 =
𝑑
In the Newton’s Ring interference experiment the Or 𝑥 ∝ 𝜆
diameter of the nth dark ring is given by 𝐷𝑛 = ∴ 𝑥 (blue) < 𝑥(green)
2√𝑛. 𝜆. 𝑅 where 𝑅 is the radius of curvature of the 276 (b)
lens and 𝜆 is the wavelength For principal maxima in grating spectra
Using the formula we have sin θ
= 𝑛𝜆
2
𝐷𝑛+𝑚 − 𝐷𝑛2 2
𝐷20 2
− 𝐷10 𝑁
𝜆= = Where, 𝑛 = (1, 2, 3) is the order of principal
4𝑚. 𝑅 4(20 − 10)𝑅
(5.82 × 10−3 )2 − (3.36 × 10−3 )2 maxima and θ is the angle of diffraction.
= = 5646[Å] 1 1
4 × 10 × 1 𝑛= = −7 5
=8
270 (b) 𝜆𝑁 6.25 × 10 × 2 × 10
∴ Number of maxima = 2𝑛 + 1 = 2 × 8 + 1 = 17
𝜆Blue < 𝜆Red . Therefore fringe pattern will
277 (a)
contract because fringe width ∝ 𝜆
𝜙
271 (a) 𝐼 = 4𝐼0 cos2
𝐷𝜆
2
We know that fringe width 𝛽 = 𝑑 At central position 𝐼1 = 4𝐼0 …(i)
𝐿𝜆 𝑥𝑑 Since the phase difference between two
∴𝑥= ⇒𝜆=
𝑑 𝐿 successive fringes is 2𝜋, the phase difference
272 (c) between two points separated by a distance equal
1 to one quarter of the distance between the two,
tan 𝑖 =
sin 𝐶 successive fringes is equal to
1 𝜋
3 𝛿 = (2𝜋) (4) = 2 radian
cot 𝑖 = sin [sin−1 ( )] 𝜋
5
⇒ 𝐼2 = 4𝐼0 cos2 ( 22 ) = 2𝐼0 …(ii)

P a g e | 20
 𝐼 4𝐼 The ratio of intensities of successive maxima is
Using (i) and (ii), 𝐼1 = 2𝐼0 = 2
2 0
279 (b) 2 2 2 2 2 2
Distance between first and sixth minima 1: ( ) :( ) :( )
3𝜋 5𝜋 7𝜋
5𝜆𝐷 4 4
𝑥= = 1: :
𝑑 9𝜋 25𝜋 2
2

𝑛𝜆𝐷 1 × 500 × 10−10 × 2 288 (c)

∴ 𝑎= =
𝑥 0.5 × 10−3 Distance of 𝑛𝑡ℎ bright fringe 𝑦𝑛 =
𝑛𝜆𝐷
, 𝑖. 𝑒. , 𝑦𝑛 ∝ 𝜆
𝑑
𝑑 = 2.5 × 10−3 m = 2.5 mm 𝑥𝑛 𝜆1 𝑥(Blue) 4360
∴ 1= ⇒ =
𝑥𝑛2 𝜆2 𝑥(Green) 5460
∴ 𝑥 (Green) > 𝑥(Blue)
280 (c) 289 (a)
𝑣 2𝜋
When the arrangement is dipped in water, ∆𝜆 = 𝜆. where 𝑣 = 𝑟𝜔 = 𝑟 × ( )
𝑐 𝑇
4320 × 7 × 108 × 2 × 3.14
𝛽 𝑥 3 ∴ ∆𝜆 = = 0.033Å
𝛽′ = = = 𝑥 = 0.75𝑥 3 × 108 × 22 × 86400
𝜇 4/3 4
290 (b)
282 (d) In interference energy is redistribution
𝑉 291 (b)
Amplitude = 10 𝑚
𝜔 For maxima ∆= 𝑑 sin 𝜃 = 𝑛𝜆
𝐶= 𝑛
𝑘 ⇒ 2𝜆 sin 𝜃 = 𝑛𝜆 ⇒ sin 𝜃 =
2
107
3 × 108 = Since value of sin 𝜃 can not be greater 1
𝑘 ∴ 𝑛 = 0, 1, 2
1
𝑘= Therefore only five maximas can be obtained on
30
2𝜋 1 both side of the screen
= ⇒ 𝜆 = 188.4𝑚 292 (c)
𝜆 30
283 (b) Let 𝑎1 and 𝑎2 be amplitudes of the two waves.
𝜆𝐷 6000 × 10−10 × 2 For maximum intensity
𝛽= = 𝐼max = (𝑎1 + 𝑎2 )2
𝑑 4 × 10−3
For minimum intensity
= 0.3 × 10−3 m = 0.3mm 𝐼min = (𝑎1 − 𝑎2 )2
𝐼 25 (𝑎 +𝑎 )2
284 (a) Given, 𝐼ma𝑥 = 1
= (𝑎1−𝑎2)2
min 1 2
As the two bright fringes coincide 𝑎1 + 𝑎2 5
⇒ =
𝑎1 − 𝑎2 1
∴ 𝑛𝜆1 = (𝑛 + 1)𝜆2
𝑎1 3
⇒ =
𝑛 + 1 𝜆1 7500 5 𝑎2 2
= = = (law of componendo and dividendo)
𝑛 𝜆2 6000 4
Also, Intensity ∝ (amplitude)2
1 5 𝐼1 𝑎1 2 9
1+ = ,𝑛 = 4 ∴ =( ) =
𝑛 4 𝐼2 𝑎2 4
285 (a) 293 (c)
𝜆′ 5000 In interference, we use two sources while in
𝛽′ = 𝛽 = 6000 × 0.48 = 0.04cm
𝜆 diffraction, we use light from two points of the
same wavefront.
286 (c)
The intensity I is minimum for phase difference, 294 (b)
𝛿 = (2𝑛 − 1)𝜋 𝑑𝜙𝐸 𝐸𝐴 𝑉 𝐴
Where 𝑛 = 1, 2, 3, … … 𝐼𝐷 = 𝜀0 = 𝜀0 = 𝜀0 ( ) .
𝑑𝑡 𝑡 𝑑 𝑡
287 (c)

P a g e | 21
 8.85 × 10−12 × 400 × 60 × 10−4 301 (c)
=
2 × 10−3 × 10−6 Amplitude of the superimposing waves are
−2
= 1.602 × 10 𝑎𝑚𝑝 𝑎1 1 1/2 1
295 (d) = ( ) =
𝑎2 9 3
In single slit diffraction, the central fringe has 𝐼minima (𝑎1 − 𝑎2 )2 1
maximum intensity and has the width double than = =
𝐼maxima (𝑎1 + 𝑎2 )2 4
other fringes. 302 (d)
To see interference, we need two sources with the
296 (b)
Here, 𝐼1 = 𝐼, 𝐼2 = 4𝐼, θ1 = 𝜋⁄2 , θ2 = 𝜋 same frequency and with a constant phase
difference. In the given waves,
𝐼𝐴 = 𝐼1 + 𝐼2 + 2√𝐼1 𝐼2 cos θ1
𝑋1 = 𝑎1 sin 𝜔𝑡
= 𝐼 + 4𝐼 + 2√1 × 4𝐼 cos 𝜋/2 = 5𝐼 And 𝑋4 = 𝑎1 sin(𝜔𝑡 + 𝛿 )

𝐼𝐵 = 𝐼1 + 𝐼2 + 2√𝐼1 𝐼2 cos θ2 Have a constant phase difference𝛿, so

interference is possible between them.
= 𝐼 + 4𝐼 + 2√𝐼 × 4𝐼 cos 𝜋
For 𝑋1 = 𝑎1 sin 𝜔𝑡
= 5𝐼 − 4𝐼 = 𝐼
And 𝑋2 = 𝑎2 sin 2𝜔𝑡
∴ 𝐼𝐴 − 𝐼𝐵 = 5𝐼 − 𝐼 = 4𝐼
Frequency is not equal and there is no constant
297 (c) phase difference.
𝐷𝜆
Fringe width is 𝛽 = 𝑑
where 𝐷 is the distance of
For 𝑋1 = 𝑎1 sin 𝜔𝑡
the slits from the screen, 𝑑 is the separation of the
slits and 𝜆, the wavelength And 𝑋3 = 𝑎1 sin 𝜔1 𝑡,
298 (a)
Destructive interference occurs when the path Frequency is different and there is no constant
difference is an odd multiple of 𝜆/2. phase difference.

Ie.
𝑥𝑑
=
(2𝑛−1)𝜆 303 (c)
𝐷 2 sin 𝛼 2 𝜙
𝐼 = 𝐼0 [ ] , where 𝛼 =
𝛼 2
Angular width of first dark fringe is 𝑡ℎ 2𝑛+1
For 𝑛 secondary maxima 𝑑 sin 𝜃 = ( 2
)𝜆
2𝑥 2(2𝑛 − 1)𝜆 𝜙 𝜋 2𝑛 + 1
= ⇒𝛼= = [𝑑 sin 𝜃] = ( )𝜋
𝐷 2𝑑 2 𝜆 2
2𝑛+1 2
Given, 𝑛 = 1, 𝜆 = 4800 Å = 4800 × 10−10 m, sin ( )𝜋 𝐼0
2
∴ 𝐼 = 𝐼0 [ 2𝑛+1
] = 2
( )𝜋 2𝑛+1
𝑑′ = 0.6 mm = 0.6 × 10−3 m 2 {( ) 𝜋}
2
4 4
So 𝐼0 : 𝐼1 : 𝐼2 = 𝐼0 : 9𝜋2 𝐼0 : 25𝜋2 𝐼0
2𝑥 2(2 × 1 − 1) × 4800 × 10−10
∴ = 4 4
𝐷 2 × 0.6 × 10−3 = 1: 2 :
9𝜋 25𝜋 2
= 8 × 10−4 rad 305 (d)
Case I : 𝑙1 = 20𝑐𝑚, 𝜃1 = 38°
299 (d) Connection = 𝐶1
Sound waves and light waves both show 𝜃1 (38°)
∴ Specific rotation, 𝛼1 = 𝑙 = 20×𝐶 Liquid 𝐴
interference 1 𝐶1 1

300 (b) Case II : 𝑙2 = 30𝑐𝑚, 𝜃2 = −24°, concentration= 𝐶2

𝑣 (−24°)
Observed frequency 𝑣 ′ = 𝑣 (1 − 𝑐 ) Specific rotation 𝛼2 = 30×𝐶2
. Liquid 𝐵
0.8𝑐 The mixture has 1 part 𝐴 and 2 part 𝐵
⇒ 𝑣 ′ = 6 × 1014 (1 − ) = 1.2 × 1014 𝐻𝑧 ∴ 𝐶1′ : 𝐶2′ = 1: 2
𝑐

P a g e | 22
 ∴ 𝜃 = [𝛼1 𝐶1′ + 𝛼2 𝐶2′ ]𝑙 ⃗ are related by 𝐸
𝐵 𝐵
38 𝐶1 (−24°) 2𝐶2
={ × + × } × 30 314 (d)
20 × 𝐶1 3 30 × 𝐶2 3
Angular position of first dark fringe
= 19° − 16° = +3° 𝜆 5460×10−10 180
The new angle of rotation is +3 in the right hand 𝜃=𝑑= 0.1×10−3
× 𝜋
(in degree)
direction = 0.313°
306 (b) 315 (d)
𝑃 1 𝜆𝐷 𝛽2 𝜆2 𝐷2 𝑑1
𝐼= 2
∝ 𝐴2 ⇒ 𝐴 ∝ 𝛽= ⇒ = ⇒ 𝛽2 = 2.5 × 10−4 𝑚
4𝜋𝑟 𝑟 𝑑 𝛽1 𝜆1 𝐷1 𝑑2
307 (d) 316 (c)
Ground wave and sky wave both are amplitude EM waves travels perpendicular to 𝐸and 𝐵. Which
modulated wave and the amplitude modulated are also perpendicular to each other 𝑣 = 𝐸⃗ × 𝐵
⃗
signal is transmitted by a transmitting antenna 317 (a)
and received by the receiving antenna at a ∆𝜆 𝑣 𝑣
distance place = ⇒1= ⇒𝑣=𝑐
𝜆 𝑐 𝑐
308 (a) 318 (d)
For single slit diffraction pattern 𝑑 sin 𝜃 = 𝜆 (𝑑 = If a third slit is made between the double slits,
slit width) then contrast between bright and dark fringes is
𝜆
Angular width = 2𝜃 = 2 sin−1 ( ) reduced.
𝑑
319 (b)
It is independent of 𝐷, 𝑖. 𝑒., distance between
Here, θ = 9.9°, 𝑙 = 20 cm = 0.2m, 𝑠 = 66°
screen and slit
310 (d) θ 9.9
𝑐 =? 𝑐 = 𝑙𝑠 = 2×66 = 0.075g cc −1
If 𝐼 is the final intensity and 𝐼0 is the initial
intensity then = 75gL−1.
10
𝐼0 𝐼 1 √3
𝐼= (cos2 30°)5 or = × ( ) = 0.12 320 (d)
2 𝐼0 2 2
311 (c) If you divide the original slit into 𝑁 strips and
𝜆 represents the light from each strip, when it
For destructive interference, path difference= 2.
reaches the screen, by a phasor, then at the
2𝜋 𝜆 central maximum in the diffraction pattern you
Therefore, phase difference= . =𝜋 add 𝑁 phasors, all in the same direction and each
𝜆 2
radian=180°. with the same amplitude. The intensity is
therefore 𝑁 2 . If you double the slit width, you
312 (a)
need 2𝑁 phasors, if they are each to have the
Angular width of central maxima
amplitude of the phasors you used for the narrow
2𝜆 2 × 589.3 × 10−9
= = 𝑟𝑎𝑑 slit. The intensity at the central maximum is
𝑑 0.1 × 10−3
180 proportional to (2𝑁)2 and is, therefore, four times
= 0.0117 × = 0.68° the intensity for the narrow slit
𝜋
313 (b) 321 (a)
𝐷
In electromagnetic wave, electric and magnetic 𝑑1 = 7𝜆1
fields are in phase 𝑑
Electromagnetic wave carry energy as they travel 𝐷
And 𝑑2 = 7𝜆2 𝑑
through space and this energy is shared equally
by electric and magnetic fields 𝑑1 𝜆1
The direction of the propagation of ∴ =
𝑑 2 𝜆2
electromagnetic wave is the direction of 𝐸⃗ × 𝐵
⃗
The pressure exerted by the wave is equal to its 322 (a)
energy density Here 𝐸0 = 100 𝑉/𝑚, 𝐵0 = 0.265 𝐴/𝑚
𝐸 ×𝐵
In electromagnetic wave, the magnitudes of 𝐸⃗ and ∴ Maximum rate of energy flow 𝑆 = 0𝜇 0
0

= 100 × 0.265 = 26.5 𝑊/𝑚2

P a g e | 23
323 (b) 𝜆𝐷 5000 × 10−10 × 1
𝛽= = = 0.25 𝑚𝑚
From 𝐼𝑅 = 𝐼1 + 𝐼2 + 2√𝐼1 𝐼2 cos ϕ 𝑑 0.2 × 10−2
334 (c)
When ϕ = 0°, 𝐼𝑅 = 𝐼 + 𝐼 + 2√𝐼𝐼 cos 0° = 4𝐼 Monochromatic wave means of single wavelength
not the single colour
When ϕ = 90° 335 (d)
Let 𝐼0 be the intensity of incident light
𝐼𝑅′ = 𝐼 + 𝐼 + 2√𝐼𝐼 cos 90° = 2𝐼
Then the intensity of light from the 1st polaroid is
𝐼𝑅 4𝐼 𝐼0
= = 2: 1 𝐼1 =
𝐼𝑅′ 2𝐼 2
Intensity of light from the 2nd polaroid is
324 (a) 2
𝐼0 1 2 𝐼0
𝐼2 = 𝐼1 cos 60° = ( ) =
If magnitude of light vector varies periodically 2 2 8
during it’s rotation, the tip of vector traces an Intensity of light from the 3 polaroid is
rd

ellipse and light is said to be elliptically polarized. 2

𝐼0 1 2 𝐼0
𝐼3 = 𝐼2 cos 60° = ( ) =
This does not happen prism 8 2 32
325 (b) Intensity of light from the 4 polaroid is
th

Area through which the energy of beam passes 2

𝐼0 1 2 𝐼0
𝐼4 = 𝐼3 cos 60° = ( ) =
= (6.328 × 10−7 )2 = 4 × 10−13 𝑚 2 32 2 128
𝑃 10−3 Intensity of light from the 5th polaroid is
∴𝐼= = = 2.5 × 109 𝑊/𝑚 2
𝐴 4 × 10−13 2
𝐼0 1 2 𝐼0
𝐼5 = 𝐼4 cos 60° = ( ) =
326 (c) 128 2 512
𝐸⃗and𝐵⃗ are mutually perpendicular to each other Therefore, the fraction of the incident light that
and are in phase i.𝑒. they become zero and passes through the system is
minimum at the same place and at the same time 𝐼5 1
=
327 (a) 𝐼0 512
Photoelectric effect explain the quantum nature of 336 (b)
light while interference, diffraction and Molecular spectra due to vibrational motion lie in
polarization explain the wave nature of light the microwave region of EM-spectrum. Due to
328 (c) Kirchhoff’s law in spectroscopy the same will be
When one slit is closed, amplitude becomes half absorbed
and intensity becomes 1/4th 337 (a)
When a mica sheet is introduced in the path of
1
𝑖𝑒,𝐼0 = 4 𝐼 or I = 4𝐼0 one of the two interfering beams, then entire
fringe pattern is displaced towards the beam is
329 (a) the path of which plate is introduce, but fringe
𝑟 2 (2.3 × 10−3 )2 width is not changed.
𝑓1 = = = 9𝑚
𝜆 5893 × 10−10
331 (c)
β
β = (μ − 1)t
λ
λ λ
⇒𝑡= = = 2λ
(μ − 1) (1.5 − 1)

332 (d)
𝑆1 𝑃 − 𝑆2 𝑃 = 11(𝜆/2) =add integral multiple of
𝜆/2

333 (a) 𝐷
𝑥0 = (𝜇 − 1)𝑡 … (𝑖)
Distance between two consecutive dark fringes 𝑑

P a g e | 24
 Also fringe width is −7 −12
𝑁 − 𝑚2
𝜇0 = 4𝜋 × 10 , 𝜀0 = 8.85 × 10
𝐶2
𝐷𝜆 1 𝑚𝑒𝑡𝑒𝑟
𝑊= So 𝑐 = = 3 × 108 𝑠𝑒𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑑
𝑑 √𝜇0 𝜀0
348 (c)
𝑊 𝐷
∴ = … (𝑖𝑖) When white light is used in Young’s double slit
𝜆 𝑑 experiment, then different coloures will be split
Using Eq. (ii) we get Eq. (i) as up on the viewing screen according to their
wavelength while the central fringe will be white.
𝑊
𝑥0 = (𝜇 − 1)𝑡
𝜆 349 (d)
𝐼 = 𝑎12 + 𝑎22 + 2𝑎1 𝑎2 cos 𝜙
Given, 𝑥0 = 1.89 × 10−3 m, 𝑊 = 0.431 × 10−3 m,
Put 𝑎12 + 𝑎22 = 𝐴 and𝑎1 𝑎2 = 𝐵; ∴ 𝐼 = 𝐴 + 𝐵 cos 𝜙
𝜇 = 1.59, 𝜆 = 5.89 × 10−7 m. 352 (d)
Photoelectric effect states that light travels in the
0.431 × 10−3 form of bundles or packets of energy, called
1.89 × 10−3 = (1.59 − 1)𝑡
5.89 × 10−7 photons. This effect is explained on the basis of
quantum nature of light. So, it clearly explains the
5.89 × 10−7 × 1.89 × 10−3
⇒ 𝑡= particle’s nature of light
0.431 × 0.59 × 10−3
353 (c)
⇒ 𝑡 = 4.38 × 10−6 m
Δ𝜆 𝑣 ∆𝜆 0.1
= ∴𝑣= 𝑐= × 3 × 105 𝑘𝑚/𝑠
338 (a) 𝜆 𝑐 𝜆 6000
Velocity of light = 5 𝑘𝑚/𝑠
𝐸 𝐸 9.3 354 (b)
−8
𝐶= ⇒𝐵= = = 3.1 × 10 𝑇 Final intensity of light is given by Malus law 𝐼 =
𝐵 𝐶 3 × 108
339 (b) 𝐼0 cos2 𝜃; where 𝜃 = Angle between transmission
Colours of thin film are due to interference of light axes of polarizer and analyser
340 (d) Hence decreasing order of intensity is (i) > (iv) >
Let it take 𝑡 𝑠𝑒𝑐 for astronaut to acquire a velocity (ii) > (iii)
−1 (i) (ii)
of 1 𝑚𝑠 . Then energy of photons = 10 𝑡 (iii) (iv)
10𝑡 30o 30o
Momentum = 𝐶
= 80 × 1 30o
8 30o
80 × 1 × 3 × 10
𝑡= = 2.4 × 109 𝑠𝑒𝑐
10
341 (c) 60o 60o 60o

Newton’s first law of motion states that every 60o

particle travels in a straight line with a constant
velocity unless disturbed by an external force. So 355 (d)
the corpuscles travels in straight lines For dark fringe,
342 (b)
𝑥𝑑 𝜆
The idea of secondary wavelets is given by = (2𝑚 − 1)
𝐷 2
Huygen
344 (b)
𝛽
Lateral displacement of fringes = 𝜆 (𝜇 − 1)𝑡
1 × 10−3
= (1.5 − 1) × 0.06 × 10−3 = 5 𝑐𝑚
600 × 10−9
345 (c)
When the source and observer approach each 𝑑
other, apparent frequency increases and hence Here, 𝑚 = 5, 𝑥 = 2
wavelength decreases
𝑑 𝑑 𝜆
347 (d) ∴ . = (2 × 5 − 1)
2 𝐷 2
P a g e | 25
 𝑑2 Where𝑎 is the width of transparent portion and 𝑏
Or 𝐷
= 9𝜆
is that of opaque portion. The width (𝑎 + 𝑏) is
𝑑2 called the grating element.
∴ 𝜆=
9𝐷
The spectral lines will overlap, 𝑖𝑒, they will have
357 (a) the same angle of diffraction of
Path difference of 3rd bright fringe from central
𝜆1 = 𝜆2
fringe=3𝜆, so that the phase difference=3(2𝜋) =
6𝜋 rad. When a line of wavelength 𝜆1 in order 𝑛1
coincides with a line of unknown wavelength 𝜆2 in
358 (c)
𝜆𝐷 order 𝑛2 , then
𝛽=
𝑑 𝑛2 𝜆2 = 𝑛1 𝜆1
359 (b)
According to Newton’s corpuscular theory, speed 𝜆
Or 𝜆1 = 𝑛2
𝑛

of light in a rarer medium (like air) is lasser than 2 1

that in a denser medium (like water, glass). 368 (c)

360 (c) At polarizing angle, the reflected and refracted
If an unpolarised light is converted into plane rays are mutually perpendicular to each other
polarized light by passing through a polaroid, it’s 369 (c)
intensity becomes half If path difference Δ = (𝑆𝑆1 + 𝑆1 𝑂) − (𝑆𝑆2 +
361 (a) 𝑆2 𝑂) = 𝑛𝜆
𝑣 1.5 × 106 𝑛 = 0, 1, 2, 3, … the central fringe at 𝑂 is a bright
∆𝜆 = 𝜆. = × 5000 = 25Å
𝑐 3 × 108 1
fringe and if the path difference Δ = (𝑛 − ) 𝜆, 𝑛 =
362 (c) 2
Newton considered light as made up of particle 1,2,3, … the central bright fringe will be a dark
called corpuscles. The corpuscles of light were fringe
assumed to be almost point like particles without 370 (d)
1
any mass. They travel with a tremendously high Intensity ∝ 2
𝑟
speed, so they experience a negligible force of 𝐼2 𝑟1 2 𝑟1 2
gravity. As a result, the corpuscles travel in a = ( ) = ( )
𝐼1 𝑟2 𝑟1 (1 + 2%)
straight line. 𝐼2 = 𝐼1 (1 + 2%)−2
Expanding by binomial theorem ⇒ 𝐼2 = 𝐼1 (1 −
363 (c)
4%)
According to Corpuscular theory different colours
∴ Intensity decreases by 4%
of light are due to different sizes of Corpuscules
371 (d)
364 (b) 2𝜋
The magnitude of electric field vector varies Phase difference = 𝜆 × path difference
periodically with time because it is the form of
2𝜋 𝜆 𝜋
electromagnetic wave ie, ϕ = 𝜆 × 6 = 3
365 (b)
ϕ
𝐸⃗ × 𝐵⃗ points in the direction of wave propagation As, 𝐼 = 𝐼max cos2 ( ) 2
366 (b)
𝐼 ϕ
EM waves transport energy, momentum and Or 𝐼 = cos2 ( 2 )
max
information but not charge. EM waves are
unchanged 𝐼 𝜋 3
Or 𝐼0
= cos2 ( 6 ) = 4
367 (c)
The equation of 𝑛th principal maxima for 372 (b)
wavelength 𝜆 is given by 𝐸 𝐸 18
𝑐= ⇒𝐵= = = 6 × 10−8 𝑇
𝐵 𝑐 3 × 108
(𝑎 + 𝑏) sin θ = 𝑛𝜆
373 (d)

P a g e | 26
 When two coherent light beams of intensities 𝑛 + 1 𝜆𝑣
= = 1.0003
𝐼1 and𝐼2 superimpose, then maximum intensity is 𝑛 𝜆𝑎
2
(√𝐼1 − √𝐼2 ) and minimum intensity 1 1
2 1+ = 1.0003, = 0.0003
is(√𝐼1 − √𝐼2 ) . But when two incoherent light 𝑛 𝑛
beams of intensities 𝐼1 and𝐼2 superimpose, then 1 104
maximum intensity is (𝐼1 + 𝐼2 ) and minimum 𝑛= =
0.0003 3
intensity is(𝐼1 − 𝐼2 ).
104
∴ 𝐼max = 5𝐼, 𝐼min = 3𝐼 ∴ 𝑥 = 𝜆𝑎 𝑛 = 6000 × 10−7 mm × = 2 mm
3

380 (d)
Interference is shown by electromagnetic as well
374 (a)
as mechanical waves
The position of 30th bright fringe
381 (d)
30𝜆𝐷 In the arrangement shown, the unpolarised light
𝑦30 =
𝑑 is incident at polarizing angle of 90° − 33° = 57°.
The reflected light is thus plane polarized light.
Now position shift of central fringe is When plane polarized light is passed through
30𝜆𝐷 Nicol prism (a polarizer or analyser), the intensity
𝑦0 = gradually reduces to zero and finally increases
𝑑
382 (b)
𝐷
But we know, 𝑦0 = (𝜇 − 1)𝑡
𝑑
𝐼max 𝑎1 + 𝑎2 2 3𝑎 + 𝑎 2 4
=( ) =( ) =
𝐼min 𝑎1 − 𝑎2 3𝑎 − 𝑎 1
30𝜆𝐷 𝐷 383 (d)
= (𝜇 − 1)𝑡
𝑑 𝑑 Let 𝑛th minima of 400 nm coincides with mth
30𝜆 30 × (6000 × 10−10 ) minima of 560 nm, then
(𝜇 − 1) = = = 0.5
𝑡 (3.6 × 10−5 ) 400 560
(2𝑛 − 1) ( ) = (2𝑚 − 1) ( )
∴ 𝜇 = 1.5 2 2
2𝑛−1 7 14
375 (c) Or 2𝑚−1 = 2 = 10 = ⋯
Position of first minima = position of third
𝑖𝑒. 4thminima of 400 nm coincides with 3rd minima
maxima 𝑖. 𝑒.,
1 × 𝜆1 𝐷 (2 × 3 + 1) 𝜆2 𝐷 of 560 nm.
= ⇒ 𝜆1 = 3.5𝜆2
𝑑 2 𝑑 Location of this minima is,
376 (c)
Resultant intensity 𝐼 = 4𝐼0 cos2 (𝜙/2) (2 × 4 − 1)(1000)(400 × 10−6 )
𝐼1 cos2 (𝜙1 /2) cos2 0 2 𝑌1 = = 14 mm
2 × 0.4
⇒ = = =
𝐼2 cos2 (𝜙2 /2) cos2 (90/2) 1
Next 11th minima of 400 nm will coincide with 8th
377 (d)
𝑚𝐷𝜆1 (𝑚 + 1)𝐷𝜆2 minima of 560 nm. Location of this minima is ,
𝑥= =
𝑑 𝑑 (2 × 11 − 1)(1000)(400 × 10−6 )
⇒ 3 × 6000 = 4𝜆2 𝑌2 = = 42 mm
3 × 6000 2 × 0.1
Or 𝜆2 = = 4500 Å
4
∴ Required distance= 𝑌2 − 𝑌1 = 28 mm
379 (a)
𝜇𝑣 = 1 and𝜇𝑎 = 1.003 384 (d)
𝜆𝑣 𝜇𝑎 Sound waves cannot be polarised as they are
∴ = = 1.0003 longitudinal. Light waves can be polarised as they
𝜆𝑎 𝜇𝑣
are transverse.
𝑥 = 𝜆𝑣 𝑛 = 𝜆𝑎 (𝑛 + 1)

P a g e | 27
385 (c) 392 (a)
𝜇𝜀 𝑟2
𝑛
Refractive index = √ Multiple focii of zone plate given by 𝑓𝑝 = (2𝑝−1)𝜆
𝜇0 𝜀0

Here 𝜇 is not specified so we can consider 𝜇 = 𝜇0 Where 𝑝 = 1, 2, 3 …

𝜀
393 (c)
Then refractive index = √ =2 𝐾 = 0.5 × 103
𝜀0

∴ Speed and wavelength of wave becomes half 2𝜋 2𝜋

= 0.5 × 103 ⇒ 𝜆 = × 10−3
and frequency remain unchanged 𝜆 0.5
𝜆 = 12.76𝑚𝑚
386 (b)
𝜆 lies in range of microwave
Wave theory of light was first proposed by
394 (c)
Christiar. Huygens. 𝑦
387 (c) Here, sin = θ = (𝐷)
𝜆 𝜆
For first minima 𝜃 = or 𝑎 = ∆y
𝑎 𝜃
−8 So, ∆θ =
6500 × 10 × 6 𝜋 D
∴𝑎= (As 30° = radian)
𝜋 6 Angular fringe width𝜃0 = ∆𝜃(width ∆𝑦 = 𝛽)
= 1.24 × 10−4 𝑐𝑚 = 1.24 microns
388 (c) 𝛽 𝐷𝜆 1 𝜆
θ0 = = × =
From Brewster’s law reflected ray is 𝐷 𝑑 𝐷 𝑑
perpendicular to refracted ray.
θ0 = 1° = π/180 rad

And 𝜆 = 6 × 10−7 m

𝜆 180
𝑑= = × 6 × 10−7
θ0 𝜋

= 3.44 × 10−5 m

= 0.03 mm

395 (a)
Condition for constructive interference is
𝜆
The reflected ray so obtained is planepolarised 2𝜇𝑡 = [2𝑛 + 1]
2
having its electric vector in the plane of incidence.
Where, 𝑛 = 0, 1, 2, 3, … …
389 (a) For minimum thickness, 𝑛 = 0
𝑎 sin θ = 𝑛𝜆 𝜆
2𝜇𝑡 =
2
𝑎𝑥 −3
𝑎𝑥 0.3 × 10 × 5 × 10 −3 𝜆 600 × 10−9
= 3𝜆 or λ = = ⇒𝑡= = = 100 nm
𝑓 3𝑓 3×1 4𝜇 4 × 1.5

= 5 × 107 m = 5000 Å 396 (b)

Here, 𝑛1 = 12, 𝜆1 = 600 nm
390 (b)
𝜙 = 𝜋/3, 𝑎1 = 4, 𝑎2 = 3 𝑛2 =? , 𝜆2 = 400 nm
So, 𝐴 = √𝑎12 + 𝑎22 + 2𝑎1 . 𝑎2 cos 𝜙 ⇒ 𝐴 = 6 As 𝑛1 𝜆1 = 𝑛2 𝜆2
391 (a)
From 𝑎 sin θ = 𝑛𝜆 𝑛1 𝜆1 12 × 600
∴ 𝑛2 = = = 18
𝜆2 400
𝑥 𝑛𝜆𝐷 1 × 6000 × 10−10 × 2
𝑎 = 𝑛𝜆, 𝑎 = = 398 (b)
𝐷 𝑥 4 × 10−3
𝑐 3 × 108
= 3 × 10 −4
= 0.3 mm 𝑣= = = 1015 𝑐𝑦𝑐𝑙𝑒/𝑠
𝜆 3000 × 10−10

P a g e | 28
399 (b) Hence resultant intensity at the same point will be
The optical path between any two points is 𝐼 = 𝐼1 + 𝐼2 + 2√𝐼1 𝐼2 = 25 + 16 + 2√25 × 16
proportional to the time of travel. = 81𝑢𝑛𝑖𝑡
403 (b)
The distance traversed by light in a medium of
𝐼0
refractive index 𝜇 in time t is given by 𝐼 = 𝐼0 cos2 𝜃 = 𝐼0 cos2 45 =
2
𝑑 = 𝑣𝑡 … … … . (𝑖) 404 (a)
𝜔 = 6 × 108
Where v is velocity of light in the medium. The 𝜔 6 × 108
𝑘= = = 2𝑚 −1
distance traversed by light in a vacuum in this 𝑣 3 × 108
time. 405 (a)
According to Brewster’s law, when a beam of
Δ = 𝑐𝑡 ordinary light (𝑖. 𝑒., unpolarised) is reflected from
𝑑 a transparent medium (like glass), the reflected
= 𝑐 . [𝐹𝑟𝑜𝑚 𝐸𝑞. (𝑖 )] light is completely plane polarized at certain angle
𝑣
of incidence called the angle of polarization
𝑐 406 (c)
=𝑑 = 𝜇𝑑(𝑖𝑖)
𝑣 Intensity of polarized light from first polarizer =
𝑐 100
(Since, 𝜇 = ) 2
= 50
𝑣 50
𝐼 = 50 cos2 60° = = 12.5
This distance is the equivalent distance in vacuum 4
and is called optical path. 407 (a)
Specific rotation
Here, optical path for first ray = 𝑛1 𝐿1 𝜃 𝜃 0.4
(𝛼 ) = ⇒ 𝑐 = = = 160𝑘𝑔/𝑚 3
𝑙𝑐 𝛼𝑙 0.01 × 0.25
Optical path for second ray = 𝑛2 𝐿2 Now percentage purity of sugar solution
160
Path difference = 𝑛1 𝐿1 − 𝑛2 𝐿2 = × 100 = 80%
200
408 (a)
Now, phase difference
If maximum electron density of the ionosphere is
2𝜋
= × path difference 𝑁max per 𝑚 3 then the critical frequency 𝑓𝑐 is given
𝜆
by 𝑓𝑐 = 9(𝑁max )1/2
2𝜋 ⇒ 10 × 106 = 9(𝑁)1/2 ⇒ 𝑁 = 1.2 × 1012 𝑚 −3
= × (𝑛1 𝐿1 − 𝑛2 𝐿2 )
𝜆 409 (a)
𝜆𝐷 𝜆 𝜆
400 (d) 𝛽= = =
𝑑 𝑑/𝐷 θ
Distance between the first dark fringes on either
side of central maxima = width of central maxima 411 (a)
2𝜆𝐷 2×600×10−9 ×2 𝑅22
= = = 2.4 𝑚𝑚
𝑑 1×10−3 𝐼0 = 𝑅2 =
401 (d) 4
2 Number of 𝐻𝑃𝑍 covered by the disc at 𝑏 = 25𝑐𝑚
𝑎1
𝐼max 𝑎
+ 1 𝑎1 + 𝑎2 𝑛 𝑏
1 1 = 𝑛 𝑏
2 2
= (𝑎21 ) ⇒ =6 𝑛 𝑏 1×1
𝐼min −1 𝑎1 − 𝑎2 𝑛2 =
1 1
= =4
𝑎2
𝑏2 0.25
7 𝑎1
= Hence the intensity at this point is
5 𝑎2
2
𝑅5 2 𝑅5 𝑅4 𝑅3 2 𝑅2 2
402 (d) 𝐼 = 𝑅′ = ( ) = ( × × ) × ( )
100
2 𝑅4 𝑅3 𝑅2 2
Intensity of each source = 𝐼0 = 4 = 25𝑢𝑛𝑖𝑡 𝐼 = (0.9)6 𝐼0
If the intensity of one of the source is reduced by 𝐼1 = 0.531𝐼0
36
36% then 𝐼1 = 25 𝑢𝑛𝑖𝑡 and 𝐼2 = 25 − 25 × 100 = Hence the correct answer will be (a)
16 (𝑢𝑛𝑖𝑡) 413 (a)

P a g e | 29
 No light is emitted from the second polaroid, so 𝑃1
and 𝑃2 are perpendicular to each other

Let the initial intensity of light is 𝐼0 . So Intensity of

𝐼0
light after transmission from first polaroid = 2
𝐼0 2
Intensity of light emitted from 𝑃3 𝐼1 = 2
cos 𝜃
Intensity of light transmitted from last polaroid When 𝑒 is decreased for same wavelength, sin θ
𝑖. 𝑒. from increases, henceθ increases. Thus, width of
𝐼0
𝑃2 = 𝐼1 cos2 (90° − 𝜃) = cos2 𝜃. sin2 𝜃 central maxima will increase.
2
𝐼0 𝐼0 421 (b)
= (2 sin 𝜃 cos 𝜃)2 = sin2 2𝜃
8 8 If intensity of each wave is 𝐼, then initially at
414 (d)
central position 𝐼𝑜 = 4𝐼. When one of the slits is
𝑣𝑠 Δ𝜆. 𝑐 47 × 3 × 108
Δ𝜆 = 𝜆 ⇒ 𝑣𝑠 = = covered then
𝑐 𝜆 4700 𝐼
= 3 × 106 𝑚/𝑠 away from earth Intensity at central position will be 𝐼 only, 𝑖. 𝑒. , 4𝑜
415 (d) 422 (c)
The coherent source cannot be obtained from two According to Rayleigh’s criterion,
different light sources
θ = 1.22𝜆/𝑑𝑒
416 (d)
Greater is the wavelength of wave higher will be
its degree of diffraction.

417 (c)
In single slit experiment,
Width of central maxima (𝑦) = 2𝜆𝐷/𝑑 Where 𝜆 = wavelength of light,
′ ′
𝑦 𝜆 𝑑 600 𝑑
⇒ = ′× = × ⇒ 𝑦 ′ = 3𝑦 𝑑𝑒 = diameter of the pupil of the eye.
𝑦 𝑑 𝜆 𝑑/2 400
418 (d) 1.22 × 500 × 10−9
If we use torch light in place of monochromatic ∴ θ= = 2.44 × 10−4 rad
2.5 × 10−3
light then overlapping of fringes pattern take 𝑎
place. Hence no fringe will appear But θ = 𝐷
419 (d)
If shift is equivalent to 𝑛 fringes then ∴distance of separation,
(𝜇 − 1)𝑡 𝑡2 𝑛2 𝑛2
𝑛= ⇒𝑛∝𝑡⇒ = ⇒ 𝑡2 = ×𝑡 𝑎 = 𝐷 × θ = 10 × 103 × 2.44 × 10−4 = 2.44 m
𝜆 𝑡1 𝑛1 𝑛1
20 423 (c)
𝑡2 = × 4.8 = 3.2𝑚𝑚
30 Light appears to travel along straight lines
420 (a) because its wavelength is very small.
The diffraction pattern of light waves of
wavelength (𝜆) diffracted by a single, long narrow 424 (b)
slit of width is shown. For first minimum. Path difference at 𝑃Δ = (𝑆1 𝑃 + (𝜇 − 1)𝑡) − 𝑆2 𝑃
= (𝑆1 𝑃 − 𝑆2 𝑃 ) + (𝜇 − 1)𝑡
𝑒 sin θ = λ

λ
sin θ =
e

P a g e | 30
 3141.59 × 10−10
S1 𝑎= = 18 × 10−6 m = 18μm
sin 1°
S2
P 429 (a)
Distance between the fringe=fringe width
425 (d)
𝐼 9𝐼 𝐼 9
From figure 𝐼1 = 4 and 𝐼2 = 64 ⇒ 𝐼2 = 16 𝜆𝐷 6 × 10−7 × 2
1 𝑥=𝛽= =
B B 𝑑 0.05 × 10−2
I I /4 9I /64
= 24 × 10−4 m = 0.24 cm
A A 3I /64

432 (a)
3I /4 3I /16
For an electromagnetic wave
1
Velocity 𝑐 = = 3 × 108 𝑚𝑠 −1
√𝜇0𝜀0
2 2
𝐼 9 Air acts almost as vacuum
√𝐼2+1 √ +1
𝐼max 1 16 49
By using 𝐼 =( ) =( ) = ∴ 𝑎 = 3 approximately
𝐼 9 1
min √𝐼2−1 √ −1 433 (a)
1 16

426 (a) When unpolarised light is made incident at

Optical rotation or optical activity is the rotation polarizing angle, the reflected light is plane
of linearly polarized light as it travels through polarized in a direction perpendicular to the plane
certain materials. It occurs in solutions of chiral of incidence.
molecules (eg, sugar), solids with rotated crystal Therefore 𝐸⃗ in reflected light will vibrate in
planes (eg, quartz) and spin polarized gases of vertical plane with respect to plane of incidence
atoms or molecules. Any linear polarization of 435 (c)
light can be written as an equal combination of 2𝜆 2×6000×10−10
Angular width= 𝑑
= 12×10−5×10−2 = 1𝑟𝑎𝑑
right hand (RHC) and left hand (LHC) circularly
436 (b)
polarized light.
In Fresnel biprism, the virtual images act as two
𝐸θ𝐷 = 𝐸RHC + 𝑒 𝑖2θ𝐷 𝐸LHC coherent sources and from these two virtual
images rays superimposed and interference
Where E is the electric field of light. fringes are formed in overlapping region AB on a
screen placed at O.
427 (c)
The number of fringes on either side of centre C of P

screen is |
f A
S1
e
𝐴𝐶 0.5 2d S O
𝑛1 = [ ] = [ ] = [23.8] = 23
𝛽 0.021 |
S2 B
g
Q
∴ Total number of fringes

= 2𝑛1 + fringe at centre

In order to measure the distance 2𝑑 between the
= 2𝑛1 + 1 = 2 × 23 + 1 virtual sources 𝑆1 and 𝑆2 . Glaze brook gave a
method, known as magnification method due to
= 46 + 1 = 47 Glaze brook. If 𝑑1

In Young’s experiment, the number of fringes 437 (b)

should be odd. For coherent sources
𝜙
428 (b) 𝐼1 = 4𝐼0 cos2
2
From diffraction at a single alit, size if aperture, = 4𝐼0
𝜆 For incoherent sources
𝑎=
sin θ
P a g e | 31
 𝐼2 = 𝐼0 + 𝐼0 = 2𝐼0 the surface so 𝑝 ≠ 0 and 𝐸 ≠ 0
𝐼1 446 (a)
∴ =2 𝐸
𝐼2 𝑐 = 𝐵0 = speed of light
438 (d) 0

𝜋 ⇒ 𝐸0 = 𝐵0 𝑐
𝑦1 = 𝑎 sin 𝜔𝑡 , 𝑦2 = 𝑎 cos 𝜔𝑡 = 𝑎 sin (𝜔𝑡 + ) Given, 𝐵0 = 2 × 10−7 𝑇, 𝑐 = 3 × 108 𝑚/𝑠
2
439 (a) 𝐸0 = 2 × 10−7 × 3 × 108 = 60𝑇 𝑚/𝑠 = 60 𝑉𝑚 −1
× (1.5 − 1) × 2 × 448 (c)
𝛽 𝛽
Shift = (𝜇 − 1)𝑡 =
𝜆 (5000×10−10)
−6 ′
𝑣 4.5 × 106
10 𝜆 = 𝜆 (1 − ) = 5890 (1 − ) = 5802Å
𝑐 3 × 108
= 2𝛽 𝑖. 𝑒. ,2 fringes upwards
449 (a)
440 (d)
𝐼max 25 For diffraction to be observed, size of aperture
= must be of the same order as wavelength of light
𝐼min 9
450 (c)
𝑎1 + 𝑎2 2 25
Or ( ) = Path difference, 𝑥 = (𝑆𝑆1 + 𝑆1 𝑂) − (𝑆𝑆2 + 𝑆2 𝑂)
𝑎1 − 𝑎2 9
If𝑥 = 𝑛𝜆, the central fringe at O will be bright.
Where 𝑎 denotes the amplitude.
If𝑥 = (2𝑛 − 1)𝜆/2, the central fringe at O will be
𝑎1+𝑎2 5 dark.
Or 𝑎1−𝑎2
=3

𝑎
451 (a)
Or 𝑎1 = 4 For interference phase difference must be
2
constant
As, (amplitude)2 ∝ intensity 452 (d)
2 𝑑 sin θ = 𝑛𝜆
𝐼 𝑎
Hence, 𝐼1 = (𝑎1) = 16
2 2
0.3 × 10−3 × θ = 6000 × 10−10
441 (a)
θ = 2 × 10−3 rad
For obtaining mth secondary minima at a point on
screen, path difference between the diffracted 453 (a)
waves ∆= 𝑑 sin θ𝑚 = ±𝑚𝜆 To see the diffraction pattern, wavelength of
radiation must be of the order of the dimensions
Where, m = 1, 2, 3, …..
of the slit. But here slit width 0.6 mm is very
442 (a) much large in comparison to wavelength of X-ray
For secondary maxima 𝑑 sin 𝜃 = 2
5𝜆 (𝜆 = 1 Å or 10−7 mm). Therefore no diffraction
pattern is observed.
𝑥 5𝜆
⇒ 𝑑𝜃 = 𝑑. =
𝐷(≈ 𝑓) 2 454 (d)
5𝜆𝑓 5 × 0.8 × 6 × 10−7 Since 𝑃 is ahead of 𝑄by90° and path difference
⇒ 2𝑥 = = = 6 × 10−3 𝑚
𝑑 4 × 10−4 between 𝑃 and 𝑄is 𝜆/4. Therefore at 𝐴, phase
= 6𝑚𝑚 difference is zero, so intensity is 4𝐼. At 𝐶 it is zero
443 (c) and at 𝐵, the phase difference is 90°, so intensity
Two beams having the same wavelength, is 2𝐼
monochromatic or white radiation, having the 455 (d)
same initial phase (coherent sources), can give 𝜆𝐷
Fringe width 𝛽 =
interference pattern by superposition. But when 𝑑

their vibrations are perpendicular to each other, Where 𝐷 is the distance between slit and screen,
interference will not be possible 𝑑 is the distance between two slits, 𝜆 is the
444 (b) wavelength of light
EM waves carry momentum and hence can exert 𝜆Δ𝐷
∴ ∆𝛽 =
pressure on surfaces. They also transfer energy to 𝑑

P a g e | 32
 Δ𝛽𝑑 10−3 × 0.03 × 10−3 Using light of wavelength 𝜆′ , 𝑛 fringes are seen,
⇒𝜆= =
Δ𝐷 5 × 10−2 then
10−3 × 3 × 10−5
= 𝐷𝜆 𝐷𝜆′
5 × 10−2 ⇒ 60 × =𝑛×
−7
= 6 × 10 𝑚 = 6000Å 𝑑 𝑑
456 (a) 60 × 𝜆 = 𝑛 × 𝜆′
If thin film appears dark
2𝜇𝑡 cos 𝑟 = 𝑛𝜆 for normal incidence 𝑟 = 0° 𝜆 6600
⇒ 𝑛 = 60 × ′
= 60 × = 90
𝑛𝜆 𝜆 4400
⇒ 2𝜇𝑡 = 𝑛𝜆 ⇒ 𝑡 =
2𝜇
466 (b)
𝜆 5890 × 10−10
⇒ 𝑡min = = = 2.945 × 10−7 𝑚 Contract between the bright and dark fringes will
2𝜇 2×1
be reduced
457 (b)
468 (c)
Infrasonic waves are mechanical waves
The locus of all particles in a medium vibrating in
458 (b)
the same phase is called wave front
Infrared causes heating effect
469 (b)
459 (b) 𝜆𝐷
𝑛1 𝜆1 = 𝑛2 𝜆2 𝛽= ⇒𝛽∝𝜆
𝑑
∴ 𝑛1 × 420 = 𝑛2 × 630 470 (a)
Or 2𝑛1 = 3𝑛2 Here, 𝜆 = 6250 Å = 6250 × 10−10 m
If 𝑛2 = 2, then 𝑛1 = 3
Therefore, thickness of soap solution is given by 𝑎 = 2 × 10−2 cm = 2 × 10−4 m
𝜆1
𝜇1 𝑡 = 𝑛1 𝐷 = 50 cm = 0.5 m
2
3 × 420
Or 𝑡 = 1.4 × 2 = 450 nm 2𝜆𝐷
Width of central maximum=
460 (c) 𝑎

It is given that 𝑟4 = √4𝑏𝜆1 and 𝑟5 = √5𝑏𝜆2 2 × 6250 × 10−10 × 0.5

=
are equal. Therefore √4𝑏𝜆1 = √5𝑏𝜆2 2 × 10−4
Or 4𝑏𝜆1 = 5𝑏𝜆2
𝜆 5
Or 𝜆1 = 4
2
312.5 × 10−3 cm
461 (a)
In vacuum velocity of all EM waves are same but
their wavelength are different
462 (d) 471 (c)
Laser beams are perfectly parallel. So that they In interference of light the energy is transferred
are very narrow and can travel a long distance from the region of destructive interference to the
without spreading. This is the feature of laser region of constructive interference. The average
while they are monochromatic and coherent these energy being always equal to the sum of the
are characteristics only energies of the interfering waves. Thus the
463 (a) phenomenon of interference is in complete
𝜆𝐷 agreement with the law of conservation of energy
𝛽 = 𝑑 ; If 𝜆 and 𝑑 both increase by 10%, there will
472 (c)
be no change in fringe width (𝛽)
𝜆
464 (d) 𝑒 sin θ = 𝜆 ⇒ sin θ ≈ θ =
𝑒
Using red light (𝜆 = 6600Å)60 fringes are seen.
𝑓𝜆
Hence, range of field of view is 𝑥 = 𝑓, θ =
𝑒
𝐷𝜆 ∴ 2𝑥 = separation between minima on either side
⇒ 60 × 𝑤 = 60 ×
𝑑 of central maximum’

P a g e | 33
 2𝑓𝜆 As 𝛽 =
𝜆𝐷
= 𝑑
𝑒
2𝑓𝜆 ∴ 𝛽 ∝ 1/𝑑
Hence, 𝑒 = 2𝑥
484 (b)
2 × 1 × 600 × 10−9 From Δ𝑆1 𝑆2 𝐷,
= = 0.3 mm
4 × 10−3 (𝑆1 𝐷)2 = (𝑆1 𝑆2 )2 + (𝑆2 𝐷)2
(𝑆1 𝑃 + 𝑃𝐷)2 = (𝑆1 𝑆2 )2 + (𝑆2 𝐷)2
474 (b)
y
Suppose the charge on the capacitor at time 𝑡is 𝑄,
S1
the electric field between the plates of the
P
𝑄
capacitor is 𝐸 = 𝜀 𝐴. The flux through the area
0 xn
4
considered is
𝑄 𝐴 𝑄 S2 x
𝜙𝐸 = . = xn D
𝜀0 𝐴 2 2𝜀0
Here 𝑆1 𝑃 is the path difference = 𝑛𝜆 for maximum
∴ The displacement current
𝑑𝜙𝐸 1 𝑑𝑄 𝑖 intensity
𝑖𝑑 = 𝜀0 = 𝜀0 ( ) = ∴ (𝑛𝜆 + 𝑥𝑛 )2 = (4𝜆)2 + (𝑥𝑛 )2
𝑑𝑡 2𝜀0 𝑑𝑡 2
16𝜆2 −𝑛2 𝜆2
478 (b) Or 𝑥𝑛 =
2𝑛𝜆
1
Fringe width (𝛽) ∝ prism Angle (𝛼) 16𝜆2 −𝜆2
Then 𝑥1 = 2𝜆
= 7.5𝜆
479 (d) 16𝜆2 − 4𝜆2
Momentum transferred in one second 𝑥2 = = 3𝜆
4𝜆
2𝑈 2𝑆𝑎𝑣 𝐴 2 × 6 × 40 × 10−4 16𝜆2 − 9𝜆2 7
𝑝= = = 𝑥3 = = 𝜆
𝑐 𝑐 3 × 108 6𝜆 6
−10 2
= 1.6 × 10 𝑘𝑔 − 𝑚/𝑠 𝑥4 = 0
480 (c) ∴ Number of points for maxima becomes 3
sin θ 2 486 (b)
𝐼 = 𝐼0 ( )
θ 𝐼
Visibility 𝑉 = 𝐼max +𝐼min = (𝐼
−𝐼 2√𝐼1 𝐼2
max min 1 +𝐼2 )
𝜋 𝑎𝑦
And θ = 𝜆 ( 𝐷 ) 2√𝐼1 /𝐼2 2√𝑃
= =
𝐼1
( + 1) (𝑃 + 1)
For principal maximum 𝑦 = 0 𝐼2
488 (c)
∴ θ=0 When the light rays fall on thin film of oil then
rays are reflected from upper and lower layer of
Hence, intensity will remain same.
the thin films. These reflected rays produce
481 (d) interference pattern due which surface of thin
𝜆𝐷 film appears as coloured.
𝛽=
𝑑
489 (d)
𝜆𝐷′ The refractive index of air is slightly more than 1.
𝛽′ =
𝑑 When chamber is evacuated, refractive index
decreases and hence the wavelength increases
𝜆(𝐷 − 𝐷′ )
𝛽 − 𝛽′ = and fringe width also increases
𝑑 490 (a)
𝜆 × 5 × 10−2 For interference frequency must be same and
3 × 10−5 = phase difference must be constant
10−3
491 (a)
3×10−5
Or 𝜆 = = 6 × 10−7 m = 6000Å Here, 𝜔 = 31.4 rads−1
50

482 (b) ∴ Time period of revolution,

P a g e | 34
 2𝜋 2 × 3.14 In Youngs’s double slit experiment half angular
𝑇= = = 0.2s
𝜔 31.4 width is given by
Energy transmitted/revolution 𝜆
sin θ =
𝑑
𝐼0
= (𝐼𝐴)𝑇 = ( 𝐴) 𝑇
2 589 × 10−9
= = 10−3
0.589 × 10−3
ϕ0 T 10−3 × 0.2
= = = 10−4 J
2 31.4 ⇒ θ = sin−1 (0.001)

496 (d)
𝑣 3600 × 103
492 (d) Δ𝜆 = 𝜆 = × 5896 = 70.75Å
𝑐 3 × 108
When the approatus is immersed is water the
𝜆
So the increased wavelength of light is observed
angular width of a fringe θ = 𝑑 and θ = 2° and the 497 (b)
2
angular width of a fringe in air 𝑎
( 1 + 1)
𝜆 ′ 𝐼max 𝑎 4 𝑎1 3
θ′ = = 2 2 = ⇒ =
𝑑 𝐼min 𝑎 1 𝑎2 1
( 1 − 1)
𝑎2
1 λ′
= 498 (d)
μω λ
λ′
3 To have the first minimum, the path difference
= between the waves from 𝐴and 𝐵 = 𝐵𝐷 =
α 4 𝑎 𝜆
′ ′
Now, =
θ λ . sin 𝜃 = . The path difference between the
2 2
θ α
λ ′ waves from 𝐴 and 𝐶 at the same point should be 𝜆
θ′ = ×θ or phase difference is 2𝜋
α
3
θ′ = × 0.2°
4
θ′ = 0.15°
493 (c)
In 1678 Huygen proposed the wave theory of
light. According to Huygen, light travels in the 501 (d)
form of waves. These waves after emerging from In the presence of thin glass plate, the fringe
the light source travel in all directions with the pattern shifts, but no change in fringe width
velocity of light. Since, waves require a medium to occurs
travel Huygen proposed an all pervading medium 502 (d)
ether. In the diffraction due to narrow slit, the first
minimum on either side on the central maximum
494 (a) in the direction θ is given by
When sources are coherent
𝑒 sin θ = ± 𝜆
𝐼𝑅 = 𝐼1 + 𝐼2 + 2√𝐼1 𝐼2 cos ϕ
When slit is narrowed that is e is reduced, the
At middle point of the screen, ϕ = 0° angle θ increases which means that the central
maximum becomes wider.
𝐼𝑅 = 𝐼 + 𝐼 + 2√𝐼𝐼 cos 0° = 4𝐼
504 (a)
When sources are incoherent, When two plane-polarised waves are
′
𝐼𝑅 = 𝐼1 + 𝐼2 = 𝐼 + 𝐼 + 2𝐼 superimposed, then under certain conditions, the
resultant light vector rotates with a constant
𝐼𝑅 4𝐼 magnitude in a plane perpendicular to the
= =2
𝐼𝑅′ 2𝐼 direction of propagation. The tip of the vector
traces a circle and the light is said to be circularly
495 (c)
P a g e | 35
 polarized. 𝐼 −𝐼
Fringe visibility (𝑉) is given by 𝑉 = 𝐼𝑚𝑎𝑥 +𝐼𝑚𝑖𝑛
𝑚𝑎𝑥 𝑚𝑖𝑛

To form circularly polarized light

507 (a)
𝐸𝑥 = 𝐸0 sin 𝜔 𝑡 Total phase difference
= Initial phase difference + Phase difference due
𝜋
𝐸𝑦 = 𝐸0 cos 𝜔 𝑡 = 𝐸0 sin (𝜔 𝑡 + ) to path
2 360° 360° 𝜆
= 66° + × ∆𝑥 = 66° + × = 66° + 90
Where, 𝐸0 is amplitude. 𝜆 𝜆 4
= 156°
Resultant amplitude
𝜋
|𝐄|2 = 𝐸02 + 𝐸02 + 2𝐸0 . 𝐸0 cos
2

|𝐄| = 𝐸0 √2 = constant

Hence, the correct graph will be option (a).

505 (b)
β
Angular width θ = D
𝜆 4800×10−10
= = = 8 × 10−4 rad
𝑑 0.6×10−3
506 (a)

P a g e | 36
1) b 2) b 3) d 4) a 201) b 202) a 203) c 204) b
5) a 6) a 7) c 8) a 205) d 206) c 207) c 208) d
9) d 10) c 11) d 12) c 209) c 210) a 211) c 212) b
13) b 14) c 15) d 16) a 213) c 214) b 215) b 216) c
17) b 18) b 19) c 20) b 217) b 218) a 219) a 220) a
21) b 22) a 23) b 24) a 221) b 222) b 223) c 224) a
25) c 26) b 27) a 28) a 225) d 226) d 227) c 228) b
29) a 30) b 31) b 32) d 229) a 230) c 231) a 232) b
33) b 34) b 35) c 36) d 233) a 234) d 235) d 236) b
37) a 38) b 39) b 40) b 237) b 238) b 239) b 240) a
41) a 42) d 43) b 44) a 241) d 242) c 243) d 244) b
45) b 46) d 47) c 48) c 245) d 246) c 247) b 248) b
49) d 50) a 51) c 52) c 249) b 250) c 251) c 252) b
53) c 54) a 55) d 56) b 253) d 254) b 255) c 256) c
57) c 58) d 59) c 60) d 257) c 258) c 259) d 260) a
61) d 62) b 63) d 64) c 261) a 262) d 263) b 264) c
65) c 66) c 67) a 68) c 265) a 266) d 267) c 268) d
69) b 70) a 71) a 72) d 269) a 270) b 271) a 272) c
73) a 74) b 75) d 76) a 273) b 274) a 275) c 276) b
77) c 78) c 79) d 80) a 277) a 278) d 279) b 280) c
81) b 82) b 83) b 84) c 281) b 282) d 283) b 284) a
85) a 86) b 87) b 88) d 285) a 286) c 287) c 288) c
89) c 90) c 91) a 92) a 289) a 290) b 291) b 292) c
93) b 94) b 95) a 96) d 293) c 294) b 295) d 296) b
97) b 98) a 99) a 100) d 297) c 298) a 299) d 300) b
101) d 102) c 103) a 104) c 301) c 302) d 303) c 304) c
105) c 106) c 107) a 108) d 305) d 306) b 307) d 308) a
109) b 110) d 111) a 112) a 309) c 310) d 311) c 312) a
113) b 114) b 115) b 116) b 313) b 314) d 315) d 316) c
117) c 118) d 119) d 120) a 317) a 318) d 319) b 320) d
121) d 122) b 123) c 124) a 321) a 322) a 323) b 324) a
125) a 126) b 127) b 128) b 325) b 326) c 327) a 328) c
129) b 130) b 131) a 132) c 329) a 330) c 331) c 332) d
133) c 134) a 135) a 136) b 333) a 334) c 335) d 336) b
137) a 138) d 139) a 140) b 337) a 338) a 339) b 340) d
141) a 142) b 143) a 144) c 341) c 342) b 343) a 344) b
145) c 146) d 147) d 148) c 345) c 346) c 347) d 348) c
149) a 150) a 151) a 152) c 349) d 350) c 351) d 352) d
153) b 154) a 155) b 156) c 353) c 354) b 355) d 356) c
157) c 158) c 159) d 160) d 357) a 358) c 359) b 360) c
161) b 162) c 163) c 164) d 361) a 362) c 363) c 364) b
165) a 166) a 167) d 168) d 365) b 366) b 367) c 368) c
169) c 170) b 171) a 172) a 369) c 370) d 371) d 372) b
173) b 174) d 175) a 176) d 373) d 374) a 375) c 376) c
177) d 178) a 179) b 180) d 377) d 378) c 379) a 380) d
181) d 182) b 183) b 184) a 381) d 382) b 383) d 384) d
185) a 186) b 187) b 188) b 385) c 386) b 387) c 388) c
189) a 190) c 191) b 192) c 389) a 390) b 391) a 392) a
193) c 194) c 195) b 196) a 393) c 394) c 395) a 396) b
197) a 198) b 199) a 200) c 397) d 398) b 399) b 400) d
Page|1
401) d 402) d 403) b 404) a
405) a 406) c 407) a 408) a
409) a 410) b 411) a 412) c
413) a 414) d 415) d 416) d
417) c 418) d 419) d 420) a
421) b 422) c 423) c 424) b
425) d 426) a 427) c 428) b
429) a 430) d 431) d 432) a
433) a 434) b 435) c 436) b
437) b 438) d 439) a 440) d
441) a 442) a 443) c 444) b
445) a 446) a 447) a 448) c
449) a 450) c 451) a 452) d
453) a 454) d 455) d 456) a
457) b 458) b 459) b 460) c
461) a 462) d 463) a 464) d
465) a 466) b 467) b 468) c
469) b 470) a 471) c 472) c
473) c 474) b 475) b 476) c
477) b 478) b 479) d 480) c
481) d 482) b 483) c 484) b
485) a 486) b 487) c 488) c
489) d 490) a 491) a 492) d
493) c 494) a 495) c 496) d
497) b 498) d 499) c 500) d
501) d 502) d 503) d 504) a
505) b 506) a 507) a

Page|2
Click here to Download more Question
Bank for Additional Chapters.
Dear Teachers and Students,

Join School of Educators' exclusive WhatsApp, Telegram, and Signal groups for FREE access
to a vast range of educational resources designed to help you achieve 100/100 in exams!
Separate groups for teachers and students are available, packed with valuable content to
boost your performance.

Additionally, benefit from expert tips, practical advice, and study hacks designed to enhance
performance in both CBSE exams and competitive entrance tests.

Don’t miss out—join today and take the first step toward academic excellence!

Join the Teachers and Students

Group by Clicking the Link Below
JOIN OUR
WHATSAPP
GROUPS
FOR FREE EDUCATIONAL
RESOURCES
JOIN SCHOOL OF EDUCATORS WHATSAPP GROUPS
FOR FREE EDUCATIONAL RESOURCES
We are thrilled to introduce the School of Educators WhatsApp Group, a
platform designed exclusively for educators to enhance your teaching & Learning
experience and learning outcomes. Here are some of the key benefits you can
expect from joining our group:

BENEFITS OF SOE WHATSAPP GROUPS

Abundance of Content: Members gain access to an extensive repository of

educational materials tailored to their class level. This includes various formats such
as PDFs, Word files, PowerPoint presentations, lesson plans, worksheets, practical
tips, viva questions, reference books, smart content, curriculum details, syllabus,
marking schemes, exam patterns, and blueprints. This rich assortment of resources
enhances teaching and learning experiences.

Immediate Doubt Resolution: The group facilitates quick clarification of doubts.

Members can seek assistance by sending messages, and experts promptly respond
to queries. This real-time interaction fosters a supportive learning environment
where educators and students can exchange knowledge and address concerns
effectively.

Access to Previous Years' Question Papers and Topper Answers: The group
provides access to previous years' question papers (PYQ) and exemplary answer
scripts of toppers. This resource is invaluable for exam preparation, allowing
individuals to familiarize themselves with the exam format, gain insights into scoring
techniques, and enhance their performance in assessments.
 Free and Unlimited Resources: Members enjoy the benefit of accessing an array of
educational resources without any cost restrictions. Whether its study materials,
teaching aids, or assessment tools, the group offers an abundance of resources
tailored to individual needs. This accessibility ensures that educators and students
have ample support in their academic endeavors without financial constraints.

Instant Access to Educational Content: SOE WhatsApp groups are a platform where
teachers can access a wide range of educational content instantly. This includes study
materials, notes, sample papers, reference materials, and relevant links shared by
group members and moderators.

Timely Updates and Reminders: SOE WhatsApp groups serve as a source of timely
updates and reminders about important dates, exam schedules, syllabus changes, and
academic events. Teachers can stay informed and well-prepared for upcoming
assessments and activities.

Interactive Learning Environment: Teachers can engage in discussions, ask questions,

and seek clarifications within the group, creating an interactive learning environment.
This fosters collaboration, peer learning, and knowledge sharing among group
members, enhancing understanding and retention of concepts.

Access to Expert Guidance: SOE WhatsApp groups are moderated by subject matter
experts, teachers, or experienced educators can benefit from their guidance,
expertise, and insights on various academic topics, exam strategies, and study
techniques.

Join the School of Educators WhatsApp Group today and unlock a world of resources,
support, and collaboration to take your teaching to new heights. To join, simply click
on the group links provided below or send a message to +91-95208-77777 expressing
your interest.

Together, let's empower ourselves & Our Students and

inspire the next generation of learners.

Best Regards,
Team
School of Educators
 Join School of Educators WhatsApp Groups

You will get Pre- Board Papers PDF, Word file, PPT, Lesson Plan, Worksheet, practical
tips and Viva questions, reference books, smart content, curriculum, syllabus,
marking scheme, toppers answer scripts, revised exam pattern, revised syllabus,
Blue Print etc. here . Join Your Subject / Class WhatsApp Group.

Kindergarten to Class XII (For Teachers Only)

Class 1 Class 2 Class 3

Class 4 Class 5 Class 6

Class 7 Class 8 Class 9

Class 10 Class 11 (Science) Class 11 (Humanities)

Class 11 (Commerce) Class 12 (Science) Class 12 (Humanities)

Class 12 (Commerce) Kindergarten

Subject Wise Secondary and Senior Secondary Groups
(IX & X For Teachers Only)
Secondary Groups (IX & X)

SST Mathematics Science

English Hindi-A IT Code-402

Hindi-B Artificial Intelligence

Senior Secondary Groups (XI & XII For Teachers Only)

Physics Chemistry English

Mathematics Biology Accountancy

Economics BST History

 Geography Sociology Hindi Elective

Hindi Core Home Science Sanskrit

Psychology Political Science Painting

Vocal Music Comp. Science IP

Physical Education APP. Mathematics Legal Studies

Entrepreneurship French IT

Artificial Intelligence

Other Important Groups (For Teachers & Principal’s)

Principal’s Group Teachers Jobs IIT/NEET

 Join School of Educators WhatsApp Groups

You will get Pre- Board Papers PDF, Word file, PPT, Lesson Plan, Worksheet, practical
tips and Viva questions, reference books, smart content, curriculum, syllabus,
marking scheme, toppers answer scripts, revised exam pattern, revised syllabus,
Blue Print etc. here . Join Your Subject / Class WhatsApp Group.

Kindergarten to Class XII (For Students Only)

Class 1 Class 2 Class 3

Class 4 Class 5 Class 6

Class 7 Class 8 Class 9

Class 10 Class 11 (Science) Class 11 (Humanities)

Class 11 (Commerce) Class 12 (Science) Class 12 (Humanities)

Class 12 (Commerce) Artificial Intelligence

(VI TO VIII)
Subject Wise Secondary and Senior Secondary Groups
(IX & X For Students Only)
Secondary Groups (IX & X)

SST Mathematics Science

English Hindi IT Code

Artificial Intelligence

Senior Secondary Groups (XI & XII For Students Only)

Physics Chemistry English

Mathematics Biology Accountancy

Economics BST History

 Geography Sociology Hindi Elective

Hindi Core Home Science Sanskrit

Psychology Political Science Painting

Music Comp. Science IP

Physical Education APP. Mathematics Legal Studies

Entrepreneurship French IT

AI IIT/NEET CUET
Groups Rules & Regulations:
To maximize the benefits of these WhatsApp groups, follow these guidelines:

1. Share your valuable resources with the group.

2. Help your fellow educators by answering their queries.
3. Watch and engage with shared videos in the group.
4. Distribute WhatsApp group resources among your students.
5. Encourage your colleagues to join these groups.

Additional notes:
1. Avoid posting messages between 9 PM and 7 AM.
2. After sharing resources with students, consider deleting outdated data if necessary.
3. It's a NO Nuisance groups, single nuisance and you will be removed.
No introductions.
No greetings or wish messages.
No personal chats or messages.
No spam. Or voice calls
Share and seek learning resources only.

Please only share and request learning resources. For assistance,

contact the helpline via WhatsApp: +91-95208-77777.
 Join Premium WhatsApp Groups
Ultimate Educational Resources!!

Join our premium groups and just Rs. 1000 and gain access to all our exclusive
materials for the entire academic year. Whether you're a student in Class IX, X, XI, or
XII, or a teacher for these grades, Artham Resources provides the ultimate tools to
enhance learning. Pay now to delve into a world of premium educational content!

Click here for more details

Class 9 Class 10 Class 11

Class 12

📣 Don't Miss Out! Elevate your academic journey with top-notch study materials and secure
your path to top scores! Revolutionize your study routine and reach your academic goals with
our comprehensive resources. Join now and set yourself up for success! 📚🌟

Best Wishes,

Team
School of Educators & Artham Resources
 SKILL MODULES BEING OFFERED IN
MIDDLE SCHOOL

Artificial Intelligence Beauty & Wellness Design Thinking & Financial Literacy
Innovation

Handicrafts Information Technology Marketing/Commercial Mass Media - Being Media

Application Literate

Data Science (Class VIII Augmented Reality /

Travel & Tourism Coding
only) Virtual Reality

Digital Citizenship Life Cycle of Medicine & Things you should know What to do when Doctor
Vaccine about keeping Medicines is not around
at home

Humanity & Covid-19 Blue Pottery Pottery Block Printing

 Food Food Preservation Baking Herbal Heritage

Khadi Mask Making Mass Media Making of a Graphic

Novel

Kashmiri Embroidery Satellites

Rockets
Embroidery

Application of Photography
Satellites
SKILL SUBJECTS AT SECONDARY LEVEL (CLASSES IX – X)

Retail Information Technology Automotive

Security

Introduction To Financial Introduction To Tourism Beauty & Wellness Agriculture

Markets

Food Production Front Office Operations Banking & Insurance Marketing & Sales

Health Care Apparel Multi Media Multi Skill Foundation

Course

Artificial Intelligence
Physical Activity Trainer Electronics & Hardware
Data Science
(NEW)

Foundation Skills For Sciences Design Thinking & Innovation (NEW)

(Pharmaceutical & Biotechnology)(NEW)
 SKILL SUBJECTS AT SR. SEC. LEVEL
(CLASSES XI – XII)

Retail InformationTechnology Web Application Automotive

Financial Markets Management Tourism Beauty & Wellness Agriculture

Food Production Front Office Operations Banking Marketing

Health Care Insurance Horticulture Typography & Comp.

Application

Geospatial Technology Electrical Technology Electronic Technology Multi-Media

 Taxation Cost Accounting Office Procedures & Shorthand (English)
Practices

Shorthand (Hindi) Air-Conditioning & Medical Diagnostics Textile Design

Refrigeration

Salesmanship Business Food Nutrition &

Design
Administration Dietetics

Mass Media Studies Library & Information Fashion Studies Applied Mathematics
Science

Yoga Early Childhood Care & Artificial Intelligence Data Science

Education

Physical Activity Land Transportation Electronics & Design Thinking &

Trainer(new) Associate (NEW) Hardware (NEW) Innovation (NEW)
 Join School of Educators Signal Groups

You will get Pre- Board Papers PDF, Word file, PPT, Lesson Plan, Worksheet, practical
tips and Viva questions, reference books, smart content, curriculum, syllabus,
marking scheme, toppers answer scripts, revised exam pattern, revised syllabus,
Blue Print etc. here . Join Your Subject / Class signal Group.

Kindergarten to Class XII

Class 2 Class 3
Class 1

Class 5 Class 6
Class 4

Class 7 Class 8 Class 9

Class 10 Class 11 (Science) Class 11 (Humanities)

Class 11 (Commerce) Class 12 (Science) Class 12 (Humanities)

Class 12 (Commerce) Kindergarten Artifical intelligence

 Subject Wise Secondary and Senior Secondary
Groups IX & X

Secondary Groups (IX & X)

SST Mathematics Science

Hindi-B
English Hindi-A

IT Artifical intelligence
IT Code-402

Senior Secondary Groups XI & XII

Physics Chemistry English

Biology Accountancy
Mathematics

BST History
Economics
 Geography Sociology Hindi Elective

Hindi Core Home Science Sanskrit

Psychology Political Science Painting

IP
Vocal Music Comp. Science

Physical Education APP. Mathematics Legal Studies

IIT/NEET
Entrepreneurship French

Artifical intelligence CUET

 Join School of Educators CBSE Telegram Groups

Kindergarten

All classes Class 1 Class 2

Class 3 Class 4 Class 5

Class 6 Class 7 Class 8

Class 9 Class 10 Class 11 (Sci)

Class 11 (Com) Class 11 (Hum) Class 12 (Sci)

Class 12 (Com) Class 12 (Hum) JEE/NEET

CUET NDA, OLYMPIAD, NTSE Principal Professional Group

Teachers Professional Group Project File Group

Join School of Educators ICSE Telegram Groups

Kindergarten Class 1 Class 2

Class 3 Class 4 Class 5

Class 6 Class 7 Class 8

Class 9 Class 10 Class 11 (Sci)

Class 11 (Com) Class 11 (Hum) Class 12 (Sci)

Class 12 (Com) Class 12 (Hum)

 ARTHAM
ARTHAM
R E S O U R C E M AT E R I A L
SOE
R E S O U R C E M AT E R I A L
NO. 1 EDUCATIONAL RESOURCES

COMPETENCY-BASED
QUESTION
B
A+ +
BANK
WITH ANSWER KEY
& STRUCTURED EXPLANATION

CLASS 12
PHYSICS

FEATURES
1 Comprehensive 2 Skill-based Learning
Develops critical thinking
3 Score Boosting
Helps to score maximum
Coverage
Includes detailed question and problem-solving skills marks in CBSE exams and
banks for Class 11 & 12 essential for cracking tough increases competitive exam
subjects PCMB exams. success potential..

4 Answer Key & 5 Exam Pattern 6 Competitive 7 NCERT Integration

Structured Explanations Aligned Exam Focus Questions and answers are
SOE Clear, well-structured Questions modeled after Specially designed to help based on the NCERT syllabus,
ensuring relevance for both
ARTHAM
R E S O U R C E M AT E R I A L
www.educatorsresource.in explanations and step-by-step the latest exam patterns to students excel in IIT, NEET,
CBSE board exams and
NO. 1 EDUCATIONAL RESOURCES
solutions to enhance ensure students are JEE, CUET, and other
understanding. well-prepared. competitive exams. entrance tests.